JP2018086308A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board capable of adjusting a sound volume properly.SOLUTION: A game board comprises: winning areas of a plurality of kinds containing a start area; first setting means for setting any of a plurality of stages as a first sound volume step on the basis of a first operation for a setting change-over switch; second setting means for setting any step of a plurality of steps as a second voice output step on the basis of a second operation for a stick controller; voice output control means for outputting voices of a sound volume according to the first voice output step and the second voice output step from a voice output part; and signal output means for a game medium to output signals capable of specifying a winning area won by the game medium and a winning number. The second setting means outputs a voice of a sound volume according to the second sound volume step, in the case where the second sound volume step is stepped over a predetermined range by a second operation, without changing said setting.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Conventionally, there are gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines and slot machines) for playing games.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a first setting unit that sets any one of a plurality of stages as a first volume stage based on a first operation performed by an employee of a gaming store. Based on a second operation performed by the player, a second setting means for setting any one of a plurality of stages as a second volume level, a first volume level set by the first setting means, and the second setting There is disclosed a gaming machine including sound output control means for outputting sound of a sound volume corresponding to the second sound volume stage set by the means from a sound output unit.

JP 2013-34617 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, when the first volume stage is changed by the first operation, the actual volume is changed by the change, so the volume is changed at a timing not intended by the player. As a result, the volume could not be adjusted appropriately.

  This invention is made in view of the said actual condition, and aims at providing the game machine which can adjust a sound volume suitably.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1),
Based on a first operation (for example, a channel switching operation of the setting changeover switch 300), a first setting means (for example, setting one of a plurality of levels as a first volume level (for example, a first volume level)) For example, an effect control CPU 120 that sets the first volume level in step S77),
Based on the second operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 30 on the operation rod), a second setting means (for example, a second volume level (for example, a second volume level)) is set as one of a plurality of levels. , CPU 120 for effect control that sets the second volume level in step S77),
Audio output control means (for example, in step S77, the first volume level and the first volume level) are output from a sound output unit (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) according to the first volume level and the second volume level. A volume control based on the two volume levels, and then performing an effect or the like at the set volume.
Display control means for controlling display contents displayed in the display area visible to the player (for example, a setting screen for volume adjustment as shown in FIG. 26 is displayed, or the volume level to be highlighted is changed. Production control CPU 120 that performs display control),
The display control means displays a stage display indicating the second volume level when the second operation is performed (for example, a region 5HH in which one of a plurality of volume levels is highlighted as the second volume level). Display in the display area (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that performs display control to display a setting screen for volume adjustment as shown in FIG. 26),
The gaming machine includes an operation device including a displacement unit that is physically displaced by the first operation at any one of a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of steps that can be taken by the first volume step as an operation target of the first operation. For example, a setting changeover switch 300 is provided.
The first setting means changes the first volume level according to the position of the displacement part displaced by the first operation,
The change in the first volume level is reflected on the condition that the level display is displayed, and is not reflected before the level display is displayed.
The audio output control means outputs a specific sound from the audio output unit when the second volume level is newly set by the second setting means, and the first volume level is newly set by the first setting means. When set to, the specific sound is not output from the sound output unit.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume from being changed at a timing not intended by the player, and to adjust the volume suitably.
“Sound output control means for outputting a sound with a sound volume corresponding to the first sound volume level set by the first setting means and the second sound volume level set by the second setting means from a sound output unit” Each time a sound is output, a sound having a volume corresponding to both the first volume level and the second volume level may be output, or during a first period (for example, after the first setting, the second setting During the previous period), at least the sound corresponding to the first volume level is output, and during the second period (for example, during the period after the second setting), at least the sound corresponding to the second volume level is output. You may do. For example, when the volume does not depend on the first volume level but depends only on the second volume level, the normal (eg, when the second operation is performed) is not based on the first volume level, The volume is set according to the two volume levels, and when the first volume level is set (for example, when the setting of the second volume level by the second operation is prohibited or when setting the initial volume or the initial light amount when the power is turned on, etc.) Alternatively, the volume (for example, the initial volume) may be set according to the first volume level, not based on the second volume level.

  The “position of the displacement part” at which the first volume level is set may be any one of a plurality of positions where the displacement part can be located, or a plurality of positions where the displacement part can be located. It can be any of all positions. In addition, when “the stage display is displayed by the display control means”, in addition to the predetermined timing and the timing for displaying the stage display during the period during which the stage display is displayed, In addition, a predetermined timing during the period from the determined timing to the display of the stage display is also included. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when a predetermined event occurs.

(2) In the game board of (1) above,
The display control means increases the second volume level indicated by the initial display of the stage display when the stage display is displayed, as the first volume level set by the first setting means is higher. (See, for example, FIG. 24)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be easily grasped, so that the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  The “initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display” may be, for example, a stage display that is displayed first after the first volume stage is set by the first setting unit. It may be a stage display that is displayed first after the game board is turned on, or may be a stage display that is displayed first in one period in which the second operation can be performed. Good. The initial display when the stage display is displayed for the first time by performing the second operation may indicate the second volume stage before being changed by the second operation. That is, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. May be.

(3) In the game board of (1) or (2) above,
The sound output control means causes the sound output unit to output a confirmation sound indicating that the second volume level is newly set by the second setting means, and indicates the first setting. When the first volume level is newly set by the means, a confirmation sound indicating that the first volume level has been newly set is not output from the audio output unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in step S77 sets the second volume level). ), The confirmation sound output control is performed, but when the first volume level is set, the confirmation sound output control is not performed.
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, since the setting can be confirmed even with sound in the second volume stage, the volume can be adjusted suitably.

(4) In any of the game boards (1) to (3) above,
The plurality of stages that can be taken by the first volume level set by the first setting means includes a limiting stage that restricts the second setting means from setting the second volume level (for example, the first volume level). The volume level includes “A” to “F”),
The game board is configured to perform setting restriction for restricting setting of the second volume level by the second setting unit when the limit level is set as the first volume level by the first setting unit. A limiting means (for example, when “A” to “F” are set as the first volume level, control is performed to display a menu screen without the “volume / light quantity adjustment” item);
You may do it.

  In such a configuration, volume setting on the player side can be restricted, and sound output at a volume unintended by the game store can be prevented.

(5) In the game board of (4) above,
In the period when the second permission condition is satisfied, the display control means responds to the correspondence image corresponding to the fact that the second permission condition is satisfied when the setting restriction is performed by the setting restriction means ( For example, a menu screen having an item of “volume / light quantity adjustment” is displayed in the display area, and the corresponding image is not displayed in the display area when the setting restriction is not performed (for example, “volume / light quantity adjustment”). Control to display a menu screen without the “Volume / Light adjustment” item instead of the menu screen with the “Adjustment” item),
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the setting of the second volume level is restricted.

(6) In the game board of (4) above,
Predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect in response to the second operation being performed when the setting restriction is performed by the setting restriction means (for example, the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “A”). When the second operation is performed at the time of “F”, an effect control CPU 120 for performing output control of a buzzer sound indicating that the volume cannot be changed is further provided.
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the setting of the second volume level is restricted.

(7) In the game board of any of (1) to (6) above,
The second setting means clears the second volume level being set at a predetermined timing (for example, when it can be determined that the player has changed), and performs an initial setting stage (for example, initial display (volume), etc. ) Is set as the second volume level (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that resets the second volume level to the initial volume when it can be determined that the player has changed).
The first volume level set by the first setting means is changed only based on the first operation (for example, since the setting changeover switch 300 is a physical switch, there is no reset).
You may do it.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being performed while the second volume level set by the second setting means is unintentionally dragged.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the example of an internal structure when the pachinko game machine of FIG. 1 is seen from the back. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an effect control board when the pachinko gaming machine of FIG. 1 is viewed from the back. It is a figure of a setting changeover switch. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random number values MR1-MR3. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between an example of the control command received by the production control board side, and an example of the processing content performed by command analysis processing according to the received control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a volume etc. setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a relationship between the state (channel) of a setting changeover switch, and the volume, light quantity, etc. which are set by volume etc. setting processing. It is a figure explaining the setting timing of a volume and a light quantity. It is a figure which shows the setting screen displayed when changing the 2nd volume level used for the setting of a volume and a light quantity, or a 2nd light quantity level (that is, when changing a volume and a light quantity by operation by a player). It is a flowchart which shows a part of volume etc. setting process which concerns on a modification. It is a figure explaining the setting timing of the sound volume and light quantity in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting screen displayed when changing the second volume level or the second light level stage used for setting the volume or light amount in the modified example (that is, when changing the volume or light amount by an operation by the player). is there. It is an example figure of the production | presentation screen in a modification. It is an example figure of the production | presentation screen in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a relationship between the state (channel) of a setting switch, and a volume. It is a figure which shows the example of a relationship between the state (channel) of a setting switch, and a volume. It is a figure which shows the example of a relationship between the state (channel) of a setting switch, and a volume. It is a system configuration figure concerning a modification. It is an example figure of the production | presentation screen in a modification. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power failure and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of CU control part 323, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power-on / normal start-up of the CU control part 323. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation of CU control part 323, and factory shipment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is a figure explaining the process of the business message sequence between SC325b and communication control IC325b. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of board | substrate authentication key authentication. It is an example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is a communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is a communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. It is another example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is the communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is the communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. is there. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of the check of a unified store code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of a board maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which cancels | releases a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which validates a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of a count counter. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage state of the data memorize | stored in RAM, and the state from which a data signal is output according to the input of CS signal and CLK signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of CPU of a count counter. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the count display process by a payout control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a power supply ON / OFF. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of the correction | amendment process of discharge intensity. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship between the change of the firing intensity T, and a total interruption period. It is the figure (the 1) which illustrated the contents of total data obtained by the result of total processing. It is the figure (the 2) which illustrated the contents of the total data obtained as a result of total processing. It is the figure (the 3) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is the figure (the 4) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a firing abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a driving | running | working area specific process. It is the figure which illustrated correspondence with a driving field and a firing intensity threshold range. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a measurement process. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the system containing a hall control and a central management apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a summary tabulation process. It is the figure which illustrated the contents of summary tabulation data. It is the figure which illustrated the data memorize | stored in the internal memory of Hallcon by threshold range memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a classification display process. It is the figure which illustrated model type data typically. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball (also referred to as a game ball) as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball emitting device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Thereafter, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game. The confirmed special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during variable display.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off as appropriate) may be included as a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED is different. What is necessary is just to be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special symbol game (also referred to as the first special symbol game) using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device. Synchronized with a special figure game using the second special figure in 4B (also referred to as a second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a fixed decoration that is a variable display result The symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area 5H is arranged. In the display area 5H, a hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game so as to be specified is performed. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable ball apparatus 6B (for example, It is generated based on the start winning by passing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the same number of symbols as in the variable display that is being held (in this embodiment, such as a circle mark, a square mark, etc., hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol) is displayed as the hold storage display. By doing. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the left area (first reserved display area) toward the display area 5H. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the hold display design displayed in the area on the right side (second reserved display area) in the display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition of the special figure game (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the occurrence of the first start prize where the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the hold data (holding memory) is digested, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the hold data (hold memory) is digested, and the second special figure hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement). When the hold data is digested, the corresponding hold display symbol is deleted. Moreover, when the other hold display symbols are displayed in the display area in which the erased hold display symbols are displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the displayed hold display. For example, the symbol is shifted to the left display position (including the display position where the erased hold display symbol was displayed).

  The variable special display reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is also referred to as a total reserved memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  You may make it provide the indicator which displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance memory with the display area 5H instead of the display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the display area 5H. And a second hold indicator 25B. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED). Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state (easy entry state) such as an open state or an expanded open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state (state where entry is difficult (including entry impossible)) such as a state or a normally open state where entry is difficult. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. If it is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by making the gaming ball enter the special prize winning port, and the game is more than the first state. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose holding indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and is formed in a passing gate 41 formed in the gaming area (a gaming ball can be passed by a predetermined member. ) Is displayed by the gate switch 21.) The number of ordinary reserved storages as the number of effective passing balls that have passed is displayed.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 30 includes an operation rod that is held by the player, and a trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is placed when the player holds the operation rod). ing. The trigger button 31A can be operated in a predetermined direction by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 30 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it can do. A trigger sensor 35A (see FIG. 2) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A or the like may be built in the operation rod. A tilt direction sensor unit 32 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 30. The tilt direction sensor unit 32 includes a transmission type photo sensor and the like, and may be any unit that detects the tilt direction (for example, front / rear / left / right direction) of the operating rod. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 30 in a lower plate is not limited to the center part of a lower plate, The position approached to either the right or left may be sufficient.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 30). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 2) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 30 are attached in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and the stick controller 30 as the position which moved to either the left or right in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that an instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling with an operating finger while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand. . On the other hand, the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and in a state where the player does not hold the operating rod of the stick controller 30. In addition, an instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a payout control board 37 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various substrates such as an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, and the like are disposed on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a power supply board 90 (FIG. 3) for supplying power to each board.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is a sub-side control board mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12, a payout control board 19, and the like. And a function for outputting and transmitting a control command (an effect control command, etc., which will be described later) as a control signal, and a function for outputting various information to the hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, etc., and displaying various reserved memory numbers.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, an input driver circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The input driver circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that a game medium has been passed or entered (a switch has been turned on)) from various switches for detecting game balls, and is a microcomputer for game control. 100. The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100, a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory, or a solenoid for a grand prize opening door. 82.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as 8R and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (audio signal) from the effect control board 12, the sound (sound signal) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for outputting (speech designated by) is mounted. Note that the sound includes sound only (for example, music composed only of a performance that does not contain a song, sound effects, etc.). The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (electric decoration signal) from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED A lamp driver circuit or the like that performs lighting / extinguishing driving (lighting / extinguishing according to the drive content indicated by the electrical signal) is mounted.

  The payout control board 37 is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board 19 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to reception of a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11), and a prize ball Execute the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. Note that the various switches may be any switch (game medium) that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a proximity switch, etc.). Any device other than a switch may be used. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. The main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a solenoid drive signal for driving the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door. The main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a prize ball number command or the like to the payout control board 19 as a control signal.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command (details will be described later). Each control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 is provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 is provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby realizing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the function of the main board 11 is realized). For the processing etc.). At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if there is a power outage and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (so-called power outage or the like), a backup power supply is discharged for a predetermined period (for example, a capacitor as a backup power supply is discharged). Until the power supply is disabled, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored in the backup RAM and backed up in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. The

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for controlling the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and an I / O 125. Yes.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby performing the effect operation using the effect electric parts and the abnormality notification operation (effect electric for the effect). A process for realizing a function of causing a part to execute a predetermined performance operation or the like is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, and a lamp A wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the control board 14. In addition, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35A, and the player on the push button 31B. As an information signal indicating that an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action has been detected is detected as a player's operation action with respect to the wiring for transmitting the operation detection signal from the push sensor 35B and the operation rod of the stick controller 30. Wiring for transmitting the operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display control) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Data, sound control data, lamp control data, drive control data, etc.) and process data including an end code.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. Since the RAM 122 is not a backup RAM, the stored data is lost when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power interruption).

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command). The control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing of switching the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and instructs the display control unit 123 to change the decorative symbol display and various effect displays. Control for causing the image display device 5 to execute an abnormality notification display or the like is performed. As an example, the display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator).
ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), LCD drive circuit, etc. may be mounted. The VDP may be a microprocessor for image processing called a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, it is transmitted to a video signal (signal output from the display control unit 123) for displaying an image transmitted to the image display device 5 or to the audio control board 13. An audio signal, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and the like are output.

  In addition, the effect control board 12 is equipped with a setting changeover switch 300 for setting a later-described first volume level and first light quantity level in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are stages for setting the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission quantity of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and are composed of a plurality of stages. As will be described in detail later, the setting changeover switch 300 is normally operable only by a person involved in the amusement store. That is, the first sound volume stage and the first light quantity stage are stages that are changed by an operation on the game store side. Further, as described later, the second volume level and the second light quantity level are set based on an operation by the player on the stick controller 30 and the like. The second volume stage and the second light quantity stage are stages for setting the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission quantity of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and are composed of a plurality of stages. The second volume stage and the second light quantity stage are stages that are changed by an operation on the player side.

  The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets the volume of the sound actually output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the first volume level and the second volume level. The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets the light quantity of light that actually turns on the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, and the like based on the first light quantity stage and the second light quantity stage. For example, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) also designates the set volume in the audio signal transmitted to the audio control board 13. As a result, the sound control board 13 executes a process of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume specified by the sound signal. That is, the sound at the volume set by the production control CPU 120 based on the first volume level and the second volume level is output. The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) also designates the set light amount by an electrical decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14. Thereby, the lamp control board 14 executes a process of lighting the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED with the light amount specified by the electrical decoration signal. That is, lighting is performed with the light amount determined by the effect control CPU 120 based on the first light amount step and the second light amount step.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output the sound of the volume set as described above, or the game effect lamp via the lamp control board 14. 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off with the light amount set as described above, or an effect image is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, thereby producing various effects. Execute. In addition, the production control CPU 120 produces an effect based on signals from the trigger sensor 35A, the push sensor 35B, and the tilt direction sensor unit 32 (that is, an operation on the stick controller 30 and a push button 31B). It is possible to produce effects in response to operations.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are arranged in the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout control board 37 is disposed below the pachinko gaming machine 1. The power supply board 90 is disposed on the lower left side. The ball payout device 97 is arranged on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponding to the prize ball supply path for paying out the prize balls. The main board 11 is stored in the board storage case 150, and the effect control board 12 is stored in the board storage case 270. Each of these substrate storage cases 150 and 270 is made of a member such as an acrylic plate having translucency. As shown in FIG. 3, the setting changeover switch 300 is arranged on the effect control board 12 so as to face the back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the back, the setting changeover switch 300 is arranged in the upper right part of the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 4), and the game board is provided through a notch 270a formed in the board storage case 270. The unit 250 can be operated from the outside.

  An employee of a game store (a game hall, a game hall, etc.) where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set can open and close the front door of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (normally, the player cannot open and close). When the employee opens the front door, the employee can rotate the member on which the effect control board 12 and the like are arranged around the rotation axis provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the employee can operate the setting changeover switch 300 of the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the player cannot normally operate the setting changeover switch 300 because the front door cannot be opened. That is, the setting changeover switch is an operation unit for a game store. That is, in this embodiment, the opening of the front door is a condition that allows the setting changeover switch 300 to be operated (a first permission condition for performing an operation for a game shop).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the setting changeover switch 300 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and these channels are changed over by rotating the knob 301. Yes. In this embodiment, a first volume level and a first light intensity level are prepared for each of the channels “0” to “F”. That is, in this embodiment, 16 levels corresponding to “0” to “F” (here, “0” to “F”, which are the same as channels), are prepared as the first volume level. In this embodiment, 16 steps corresponding to “0” to “F” (here, “0” to “F” which are the same as the channels) are prepared as the first light amount steps. That is, if the channel is “0”, the first volume level and the first light intensity level of “0” are set, and if the channel is “1”, the first volume level and the first light intensity level of “1” are set. If the channel is “F”, the first volume level and the first light intensity level of “F” are set. In this embodiment, the setting changeover switch 300 is directly or indirectly connected to the effect control CPU 120 via a predetermined circuit, and the effect control CPU 120 can read the current channel of the setting changeover switch 300. (For example, a signal corresponding to the channel is input to the effect control CPU 120).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the gaming machine is directly payout of a game ball to be a prize ball or a score equivalent to this. The record information of the game balls and the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be any value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game on a gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the gaming machine is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score, for example, controlling to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probable change state. In other words, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “2”), and the variable that can be executed in the short time state. The upper limit number of times of display is a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number of times (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first that the probability of being a probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”) Ren Chang (E.g., "10"), such as part or all of it to be, may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. (The first start port switch 22A is turned on) or the like is satisfied. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied by the fact that the 2 start port switch 22B is turned on). Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol. The usual chart start condition is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. A round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening, a winning ball (game ball that has entered the big prize opening) is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. It is. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, as a round game in the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player (a jackpot opening state is opened). The normal opening round in which the upper limit time to be a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 29 seconds) is executed for a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds (15 times). Note that the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state is a short-time end of one of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of variable display (special game) and the start of the next big hit gaming state. It is controlled to continue until the condition is satisfied first. Note that the remaining number of executions of variable display (such as a special figure game) until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-save remaining number. The short-time state and the probability variation state are also advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state ends is a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is ended is a short time state and a probability variation state.

  The normal state is a game state other than a state advantageous to the player, such as a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, or a probability change state. The probability of “per figure” and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game will be “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  In the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the non-short time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Alternatively, the state is changed between an enlarged open state and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Time-short states are also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, etc., and game states that are not time-short states are also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. Is called. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is “low probability state”, “low probability”, “non-probability variation state”, “non-probability variation”. Is also said. The gaming state when in the probable change state and the short time state is also referred to as “high-accuracy high base state”, “high-accuracy high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In (variable display period), the decorative symbol variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display mode in which all or a part of the combination is changed and changed in synchronization.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, An effect of reproducing and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called variable display effects together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself (this is also an effect). That is, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable symbol display itself. The effect during variable display may be an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game and causes the player to recognize the progress of the game, for example. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image (including the variable display of the decorative pattern itself) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, effects such as lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included.

  In the variable display effect, a reach effect may be executed. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, or changing the display mode of the background image. It is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode, by playing a video that is different from the decorative pattern, or by changing the change mode of the decorative pattern. The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. In this embodiment, a normal reach, a super reach A, a super reach B, and a super reach C having different production modes are prepared as reach productions (see FIG. 15, details will be described later).

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” By deciding and displaying the decorative symbols all together, it is only necessary to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, they may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a certain type of fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). .

  When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variation big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a type of a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach-losing combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. The RAM 102 is cleared, for example, when an operation unit for initialization such as a clear switch (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated when the power is turned on. This operation is performed outside the business hours of the amusement store, for example. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop (at the time of power interruption due to a power failure or the like) is executed, and then the loop process is started. (For example, when a predetermined data is stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on (on) without pressing the clear switch (for example, when power is cut off)).

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process.

  In the game control timer interrupt process, for example, the CPU 103 performs a switch process, performs a main side error process, performs an information output process, and then performs a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, Processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as command control processing, is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

  The switch processing is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the input driver circuit 110. Is a process for determining for each switch whether or not is in an on state (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). In the switch process, for example, a setting for transmitting a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the switches determined to be in the ON state (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23) is also performed. . The award ball number command is transmitted to the payout control board 37 by the command control process. Upon receiving this command, the payout control board 37 controls the ball payout device 97 to win the award ball by the number of award balls indicated by this command. The process of paying out is executed.

  The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

  The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer (hall computer) installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. It only has to be included (see FIG. 8). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “100” to “100”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. It can take any value of “251”.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the game state, determination of variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of special game), special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state In order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of round game or short-term opening control) of the special prize opening in the predetermined procedure, various processes are selected and executed. Although the details of the special symbol process will be described later, by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

  In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined in the switch process that the gate switch 21 is turned on), the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If there is not, hold storage of the usual game (for example, extract a random value and store it in the RAM 102), or use the hold memory (random number stored in the RAM 102) to determine the variable display result of the usual game. Or, the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the regular game is determined, and the normal symbol display 20 is controlled according to the variation pattern to control the display operation (for example, lighting or extinguishing of the segment LED). First, the variable display result of the normal game can be derived and displayed, or when the variable display result is per general map, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened first. Or carried out the process of the state. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal game, the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B at the time of the normal game, etc. are realized.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control boards such as the effect control board 12 and the payout control board 37. As an example, in special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, switch processing, and the like, transmission settings for control commands (such as effect control commands) are performed (for example, storage address values of control commands to be transmitted are stored in the RAM 102). In the command control process, a process of actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 12 and the payout control board 37 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

  After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, main control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  Command 8001 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in a later-described variation pattern designation command. The first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command is transmitted and set together with the variation pattern designation command and the like in later-described step S111 executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 81XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates a variation pattern of a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of a special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern (see FIG. 15, details will be described later) is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “01” for the variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of the decorative symbol, and is transmitted and set in step S111 described later that is executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that designates whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “big hit” for the big hit type “probable change”). "01"). The display result designation command is transmitted and set in step S111 described later, which is executed when the variation pattern is set together with the variation pattern designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result (stopped symbols) is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted and set at the end of the special figure game in step S112 described later.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating a game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), “XX” is set to “00”. For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, “XX” is set to “01”. For example, “XX” is set to “02” if the gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state. The gaming state designation command is set to be transmitted at the time of execution of step S113 and step S117, which will be described later, in which the gaming state can be changed.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (hit start designation command) for designating the start of a big hit gaming state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. This command is set to be transmitted when the big hit gaming state is started in step S113 described later.

  Command A300 (H) is an effect control command (hit end designation command) for designating the end of the big hit gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. This command is set to be transmitted when the last round game is completed in step S116 described later.

  Command B100 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening winning designation command) for designating that the first starting winning is generated due to the entry of the game medium into the first start winning opening. Command B200 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening winning designation command) for designating that a second start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start winning opening. The first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start opening prize designation command. These commands are transmitted and set in a start winning determination process (step S101) described later.

  Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the first special figure reservation storage number. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a special figure pending memory number designation command. The special figure reserved memory number designation command is transmitted and set in later-described step S101 and step S111 in which the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number can change.

  Command C500 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display of a demonstration screen. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted and set in step S110 when there is no pending storage.

  Next, the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is turned on ( Step S201). If it is determined in the switch process that the first start port switch 22A is on, for example, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the special game using the first special view It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the first stored value of a first special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit). It suffices if the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). If it is determined in the switch process that the second start port switch 22B is on, for example, and the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the special game using the second special view It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the second stored value of the second special figure reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No), or if the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After either of the processes of steps S203 and S206 is executed, the special figure reservation storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). Also, the second special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numeric data (see FIG. 9) indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A and specify the first special figure hold memory number added by one. May be displayed on the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of lighted LEDs is increased by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display that can specify the number of the second special figure hold memory added by one. You may make it make the 2nd holding | maintenance display device 25B perform (for example, increase the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 10A is not started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like as the reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result ( On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 10 (B) has not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The number data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like is used as the reserved data. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure (variable display) is held, and the variable display result (in this special figure game) On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning command (step S211). The start winning command is composed of a start opening winning designation command and a special figure reserved memory number designation command. When the starting port buffer value is “1”, transmission setting of a first starting port winning designation command and a first special figure reserved memory number designation command is performed as a start winning command. When the start port buffer value is “2”, transmission setting of the second start port winning designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command is performed as the start winning command. The command set for transmission is transmitted by command control processing.

  The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number (the number of such memories). The special figure reserved memory number to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved memory number counter or the second special figure reserved memory number counter.

  After step S211, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  Returning to FIG. 7, after executing the start winning determination process in step S <b> 101, the CPU 103 performs steps S <b> 110 to 10 in accordance with the value of the special process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. One of the processes of S117 is selected and executed.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the top area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating the predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by one, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by one, and the second special figure reserved memory number is also subtracted. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reservation data stored in the storage area lower than the holding number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit is higher by one entry ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), for example, the first area of the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) at the first start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1 and updated to update the first special figure reserved memory number to 1 and the first special figure reserved memory number is updated. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12 as a use table. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 12, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “lost”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not the game state is the probability variation state.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. Whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state to the determined value that matches the random value MR1 by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether or not there is numerical data indicating the random value MR1 Accordingly, the assigned determination result of “big hit” or “lost” may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 only has to determine that the probability variation state is present when the probability variation flag (a flag that turns on the probability variation state in particular) is on. For example, when the random value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is in an on state (in the probability variation state), and the probability variation flag is turned off. In the case of a state (in the case of an uncertain change state), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher decision ratio than in the non-probability variation state. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end process in step S117 shown in FIG. 7 (details will be described later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”. When the current state is a probable change state, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit game state than in the non-probability change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13 as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. As long as it is assigned to the determination result.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the jackpot read from the random number buffer for variation Select one of the jackpot types assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 by referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the type do it.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 stores in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type (for example, “0” in the case of “non-probability change”). In the case of “probability change”, the value of “1”) is stored to store the jackpot type.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), after step S243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value). Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 in FIG. 7 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special diagram variation time) from the start of variable symbol special display until the finalized special symbol resulting in variable display is derived is determined. Is done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S111 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263).

  FIG. 15 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach” that does not become the reach mode, and the reach mode is “ A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “big hit”.

  In this embodiment, PA1-1 and PA1-2 are prepared as fluctuation patterns of “losing” in the case of “non-reach”. As the fluctuation pattern of “losing” in the case of “reach”, PA2-1 (normal reach is executed), PB2-1 (super reach A is executed), PB2-2 (super reach B is executed). PB2-3 (Super Reach C is executed) is prepared. Further, as a variation pattern of “big hit” when the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, PA4-1 (normal reach is executed), PB4-1 (super reach A is executed), PB4-2 (super reach B is executed) and PB4-3 (super reach C is executed) are prepared.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 14, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 reads the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the random number buffer for fluctuation, and refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the read random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern assigned to the determined value corresponding to MR3 may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PB4-2.

  In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 14, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the loss variation pattern determination table, depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a non-short-time state (by a short-time flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (a flag that is turned on in the short-time state)) The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the variation random number buffer and the state of the time reduction flag. What is necessary is just to determine (select) the variation pattern assigned to the determined value depending on whether or not it is in the short-time state as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random number MR3 is “220”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the time reduction flag is in the on state (when in the time reduction state), and when the time reduction flag is in the off state (non-time reduction state). ), The variation pattern PB2-1 is selected.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17, a variation pattern with a short special variation time is more easily selected in the short-time state, and in the short-time state, it is more average than in the non-short-time state. By shortening the variable display time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and to reduce the stop of the game ball fired by the player (so-called “stop hit”). Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

  16 and 17, when the super reach C is executed in the reach effect, the variable display result is “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach B, Super Reach A, and Normal Reach, the rate at which the variable display result is “big hit” (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

  After executing any one of steps S262 and S263 shown in FIG. 14, a special symbol variable time (also referred to as a variable time) that is a variable symbol display time is set (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 15, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The special figure change time is set by, for example, setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The determination of the variation pattern is also the determination of the special figure variation time.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. Control for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games in which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, control is performed to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, control is performed to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Thereby, a special figure game is started. When starting variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc., transmission setting of a command (variation start command) at the start of special symbol variation Is performed (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), a first special figure reserved memory number specifying command ( The first special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S237, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started. Perform transmission settings for sequential transmission. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), a second special figure reserved memory number specifying command ( The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S233, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory count when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started. Perform transmission settings for sequential transmission.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 in FIG. 7 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (the timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so control for executing variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first The first special symbol display is performed by updating the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (control for transmitting a driving signal to appropriately update the display for maintaining the special symbol display for a predetermined time. The same applies hereinafter). In the device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for changing the special symbol is performed, and the special symbol changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display The apparatus 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) that is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). It is good to control so that it is continuously displayed.) When the display is stopped, the symbol confirmation designation command transmission setting is also performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are reset (turned off), and the remaining number of variable displays executed in the time reduction state provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (time reduction remaining number) ) Is counted. The count value of the short time counter is counted as “0”. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “15” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 102 for counting round games. After that, it is set to send a hit start designation command and a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state (in this case, a command for designating the normal state), and the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. The symbol stop process is terminated. Since the gaming state is changed after the big hit gaming state, it is not necessary to transmit the gaming state designation command here.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is in the on state. If it is in the on state, “1” is subtracted from the count value of the time reduction number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”. If the count value is “0”, the time-short end condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied (that is, Since a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the state has been executed), the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction state. Thereafter, transmission setting for transmitting a game state designation command based on the current game state is performed. When the time flag is off, the count value after subtracting “1” is not “0”, or after the game state designation command transmission setting, the special process flag value is updated to “0”, etc. Then, the special symbol stop process is finished.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, for example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the game control process timer. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is “0”, the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the round game start timing has come. In this case, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the grand prize opening (for example, the process of transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door), the big prize opening A process for setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the period during which the game is opened to the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit release process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 in one round game (switch Each time the count switch 23 is determined to be in the ON state in the process, the winning prize opening may be changed from the open state to the closed state (or the counter may be counted by a counter (provided in the RAM 102) or the like). Including a process for determining whether or not it is time to return to a partially open state).

  When it is determined that the timer value after decrementing by 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), the big prize opening is closed. Therefore, the process of returning the special winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of turning off the solenoid 82 by stopping the transmission of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door) Processing to set the timer value corresponding to the winning period closing period (a round game interval period, a preset period) in the game control process timer, or to decrement the count value of the round counter is executed Is done. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big prize opening (for example, the solenoid drive signal Etc.), and the process during the big hit release is completed. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, there are processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”, and the like. Done.

  If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so the ending waiting time (start of ending in the big hit gaming state) The timer value corresponding to the waiting time until the end of the game is set in the game control process timer. In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is performed, and processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7” is also performed.

  When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the process for opening the big winning opening and the period for opening the big winning opening. A process for setting the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 after the big winning opening is opened in step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, and the jackpot end processing is ended as it is. When the timer value decremented by 1 reaches 0, the ending ends, so depending on the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer, the short time flag, short time counter, probability variation flag, etc. Set the state.

  For example, if the big hit type is “probability change”, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and “100” is set as a count initial value in the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the hour / hour flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the initial count value in the hour / hour counter. In the jackpot end processing, after such setting, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state corresponding to the setting is performed, and various data such as a gaming control process timer and a jackpot type buffer setting value (next value) The variable is not carried over to the variable display), and the special figure process flag value is updated to “0”.

Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an example of the effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and the CTC mounted on the production control board 12. (Counter / timer circuit) register setting etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits (step S72; No).

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing (step S74) is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, various control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer (provided in the RAM 122) are read out and then read out. Setting or control corresponding to the control command is performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process, for example, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process (step S76) is executed, and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is obtained by software as various random values used for effect control. Update. After step S76, a volume setting process (step S77) for setting the volume and the like is executed, and the process proceeds to step S72.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a table of processes performed in the command analysis process for each control command. Each reception flag and each storage area in the table are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the reception flag means turning on. Note that the reception flag and the command stored in the storage area may be appropriately cleared at an appropriate timing (for example, when the reception of the command is confirmed once by the reception flag and the confirmation is performed again later) Clear if necessary, etc.)

  When receiving the gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received gaming state designation command. The high-accuracy flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the probability-changing state. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the short time state. The high time flag on the main board 11 side is turned on. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command designates the high-accuracy high-base state (for example, when the probability change flag and the time-short flag are designated to be on), the effect control CPU 120 designates the high-probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if the flag is already on, the on state is maintained. Hereinafter, the on state and the off state for both flags are the same). When the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and high base Turn off the flag. When the gaming state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in an off state), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Turn off.

  When the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command is received, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display the current display You may make it change the number of the pending | holding display symbols in a number according to the memory | storage number which each command designates. It should be noted that the number of reserved display symbols may be reduced at step S171 described later.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 19, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. Thus, any one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether the first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received (for example, whether each reception flag is in an on state). Based on this, it includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. When the first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. . In other cases, the variable display start waiting process is terminated without updating the value of the effect process flag.

  In this variable display start waiting process, if it is not determined to start variable display of decorative symbols, and a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted (the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag is turned on). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for displaying the demonstration screen (at this time, for example, the flag is cleared and turned off). The demonstration screen display is executed using various data such as an effect control pattern stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to display a demo image on the image display device 5, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R by outputting a command (audio signal) to the audio control board 13. And effect operation control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 is performed. Execution of the demonstration screen display is realized by repeatedly executing the effect operation control for each timer interruption.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the special figure display result based on, for example, a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined to be “lost” (step S521). When the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 is displayed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2) corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is not the reach mode (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by a random counter for performance provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 is extracted. Then, by referring to a non-reach combination decoration design determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, a finalized design (non-reach combination decoration design) is determined.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when the variation pattern is PA2-1, PB2-1 to PB2-3) (step S522; No), the final stop constituting the reach combination A combination of the determined decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. For example, the determined decorative design (the decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative design determination table of the reach combination.

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for performance is extracted. Subsequently, for example, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11, the jackpot confirmation preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 is prepared. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern.

  After steps S523, S524, and S525, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (stored in advance in the ROM 121) corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command as a usage pattern (step S530). ). A plurality of types of effect control patterns are prepared corresponding to the variation patterns, and here, an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is selected and set.

  After step S530, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the initial value (corresponding to the variation pattern) of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. An initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time is set (step S531).

  Then, a setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 (a start setting for effect operation control) is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined (set) as the use pattern in step S530, and the “left” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is controlled. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be changed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time (special drawing change time) corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example. (Step S551). As an example, in the process of step S551, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the data associated with the process timer determination value that is the same value as the timer value decremented by 1 is an end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed.

  When it is not the end code, that is, when the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect. (Step S558). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The reach effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value having the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) represents the reach effect execution period. If it is determined (step S558; Yes), the production operation control for executing the reach production is performed (step S559). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reach effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data for execution (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, drive control data, etc.), the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5. The sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. By executing step S559 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of reach production is realized.

  After step S559, when it is determined that it is not the reach production execution period (step S558; No), other production operation control is performed (step S560). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control execution associated with a process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.), the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the effect image on the image display device 5, and the instruction (audio signal) to the audio control board 13 To perform sound effects such as outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R by turning on, turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. . By repeatedly executing step S560 for each timer interruption, execution of other effects (for example, a decorative symbol variable display operation or the like) is realized. After step S560, the effect process during variable display ends.

  When the data corresponding to the timer value decremented by 1 in the process of step S551 is an end code, and the special figure variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (also a special figure game) (step S551; Yes) ), It is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (whether or not the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is in an ON state) (step S561). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is off and no symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S561; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation designation command normally. It may be executed.

  If a symbol confirmation designation command is received in step S561 (step S561; Yes), for example, a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) (determined ornament symbol of the combination determined in step S171) that becomes the variable display result in step S562. At this time, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer (step S563). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S564), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, for example. When it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is selected as the use pattern, and further, the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is executed. A timer initial value corresponding to the time is set in the effect control process timer. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”.

  If it is determined that no hit start designation command has been received, the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1. If the timer value obtained by decrementing by 1 is not 0, the special figure waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is 0 (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing”, and the effect process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  The hit process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this hit process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to produce the production image on the image display device 5. Displaying, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound signal) to the sound control board 13, and outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration Production operation control such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is performed. By repeatedly executing step S174 for each timer interruption, the execution corresponding to the big hit gaming state (for example, an effect including fanfare and excluding ending) is realized. In the hit processing, it is further determined whether or not a hit end designation command has been received. If no hit end designation command has been received, all round games have not ended, so the value of the effect control process flag should be updated. The process is terminated without hitting. Further, when the winning end designation command is received, all the round games are ended, and therefore the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to step S175 in order to start the ending effect. Update to 5 ". At the time of this update, an effect control pattern for executing ending is selected as a use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer.

  The ending process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the timer value of the production control process timer, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the production control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5. The sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (audio signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Production operation control such as turning on / off / flashing is performed. The execution of the ending effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S175 for each timer interruption. If the timer value after decrementing by 1 is “0”, or if the data associated with the process timer judgment value that is the same as the timer value after decrementing by 1 is the end code, the rendering process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  Next, the sound volume setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sound volume setting process. In the volume setting process, the setting of the volume (the volume of the sound actually output from the speakers 8L and 8R, hereinafter simply referred to as “volume”) and the light amount (the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, etc. are actually turned on. This is a process for setting the amount of light when it is performed, hereinafter simply referred to as “light amount”), and displaying other menus. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the state (channel) of the setting changeover switch and the volume, light quantity, etc. set in the volume setting process. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the setting timing of the volume and the light amount. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a setting screen that is displayed when the second volume level or the second light level stage used for setting the volume or light quantity is changed (that is, when the volume or light quantity is changed by an operation by the player). It is.

  In the volume setting process, the menu screen is displayed while the demo screen is displayed. The menu screen includes a plurality of selection items including “volume / light quantity adjustment”. The player can select a desired selection item using the stick controller 30 or the like. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items is highlighted (flashing display, display for changing the color of the selection item, etc.). The selected item to be highlighted is a selection target. The player uses the stick controller 30 or the like to switch the highlighted selection item, and selects the highlighted selection item by pressing the push button 31B. As a result, a desired selection item is selected. When a selection item is selected, a screen corresponding to the selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

  The selection item of “volume / light quantity adjustment” is selected by the player when adjusting the volume and light quantity, and the setting screen of FIG. 26 is displayed by selection. As shown in FIG. 26, in the setting screen, a plurality of volume levels (“2” to “14” circled) and a plurality of light intensity levels (“50%”, “75%”, “ 100% ") is displayed in the area 5HH and the area 5HL. Note that the light intensity level displayed on the setting screen varies depending on the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 (details will be described later). Each volume level (“2” to “14”) is a level that can be taken by the second volume level used for setting the volume. Of each volume level, the highlighted volume level (“10” in FIG. 26) becomes the current second volume level. The volume level to be highlighted, that is, the second volume level is changed by an operation using the stick controller 30 or the like. Each light quantity step (“50%”, “75%”, “100%”, etc.) on the setting screen is a stage that can be taken by the second light quantity step used for setting the light quantity. Of each light quantity stage, the highlighted light quantity stage ("75%" in FIG. 26) is the current second light quantity stage. The highlighted light quantity step, that is, the second light quantity step is changed by an operation using the stick controller 30 or the like. When the second volume stage or the second light quantity stage is changed, the volume or light quantity is set based on the changed stage and the current first volume stage or first light quantity stage. That is, the volume and the light quantity are changed by changing the highlighted volume level and the light quantity stage on the setting screen of FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the display of the demonstration screen and the display of the setting screen allows the player to perform an operation for setting the volume and light amount (second volume step and second light amount step) (player). 2nd permission condition for performing the operation for the above.

  Note that when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F”, the setting of the volume and the amount of light by the player is restricted. That is, the setting of the second volume level and the second light quantity level is limited. At this time, the sound volume and the light amount are set based on only the first sound volume step and the first light amount step.

  As for the volume and the light amount, a possible range is determined in advance. Specifically, the volume has 21 levels from “2” to “22” (the larger the number, the higher the volume), and the light intensity is “30%”, “50%”, “65%”, “75”. % ”And“ 100% ”(see FIG. 24). Note that the volume during production is not always constant. The set volume is, for example, the maximum volume that is allowed to be output during production. The amount of light during production is not always constant. The amount of light is, for example, the maximum amount of light that is allowed during production. Note that the level of the light amount is indicated by a ratio (%) where the maximum light amount is 100%.

  Here, the relationship between the actual volume and light amount and the first volume level will be described with reference to FIG.

  The row of the setting changeover switch 300 indicates the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 (which is also the first volume level and the second volume level) (“0” to “F”).

  The row of initial display (volume) indicates the volume level (second volume level) highlighted in the setting screen, which is displayed first after the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed or after the power is turned on (this volume level). Volume level is called initial display (volume)). When the channel is “0”, the initial display (volume) is “2”, when the channel is “1”, the initial display (volume) is “3”, and when the channel is “2”. The initial display (volume) is “4”, the initial display (volume) is “6” when the channel is “3”, and the initial display (volume) is “6” when the channel is “4”. When the channel is “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9”, the initial display (volume) is “10”, “11”, “12”, respectively. , “13”, “14”. When the channel is “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level is restricted and the setting screen of FIG. 26 is not displayed, so the initial display is not set.

  The row of the actual volume range (channels “0” to “9”) indicates the range that the volume can take. Note that the numbers in parentheses described in the volume range row are the values of the second volume level (the volume level to be highlighted) at that volume level. For example, “2 (2)” indicates that the volume is “2” when the second volume level is “2”. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the channel is “0” to “4”, the volume is “2” to “14”. When the second volume level is increased to “2”, “3”, “4”... “14”, the volume is correspondingly increased to “2”, “3”, “4”. "It goes up. That is, the values of the volume and the second volume level are the same. When the channel is “5” to “9”, the volume is “10” to “22”. When the second volume level is increased to “2”, “3”, “4”... “14”, the volume is correspondingly increased to “10”, “11”, “12”. "It goes up. That is, the volume is a value obtained by adding “8” to the value of the second volume level. In this embodiment, in this way, the range that the actual volume can take varies depending on the first volume level.

  The actual volume (channels “A” to “F”) row indicates the set volume. When the channel is “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level is limited, and the volume is not changed, so the volume is fixed. When the channel is “A”, the volume is “2”, when the channel is “B”, the volume is “4”, and when the channel is “C”, the volume is “7”. When the channels are “D”, “E”, and “F”, the volumes are “10”, “15”, and “22”, respectively.

  The row of initial display (light quantity) indicates the light quantity stage (second light quantity stage) to be highlighted on the setting screen, which is displayed first after the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed or after the power is turned on. (Light intensity level is called initial display (light intensity)). When the channel is “0” and “1”, the initial display (light quantity) is “30%”, and when the channel is “2” and “3”, the initial display (light quantity) is “65%”. (The light intensity levels displayed on the setting screen are “30%”, “65%”, and “100%”). When the channel is “4” and “5”, the initial display (light quantity) is “50%”, and when the channel is “6” and “7”, the initial display (light quantity) is “75%”. When the channel is “8” and “9”, the initial display (light quantity) is “75%” (the light quantity levels displayed on the setting screen are “50%”, “75%”, “100”). % "). When the channel is “A” to “F”, the setting of the second light quantity step is limited, and the setting screen of FIG. 26 is not displayed, so the initial display is not set.

  The row of the actual light amount range (channels “0” to “9”) indicates the range that the light amount can take. Unlike the sound volume, the light amount becomes the same value as the highlighted light amount step (second light amount step) (the value may be different for the sound volume). As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the channel is “0” to “3”, the light amount is any one of “30%”, “65%”, and “100%”. When the channel is “4” to “9”, the light amount is “50%”, “75%”, or “100%”.

  The row of actual light amount (when the channel is “A” to “F”) indicates the light amount to be set. When the channel is “A” to “F”, the setting of the second light quantity step is limited, and the light quantity is not changed. Therefore, the light quantity is fixed. When the channel is “A” and “B”, the light amount is “35%”, when the channel is “C” and “D”, the light amount is “75%”, and the channel is “E” and “E”. In the case of “F”, the initial display (light quantity) is “100%”.

  The initial volume and the initial light amount when the power is turned on may be determined in advance according to the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 when the power is turned on, for example. For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 in the initialization process of step S71 and corresponds to the stage (“0” to “F”) of the read channel (“0” to “F”). F ”, and corresponds to the channel on a one-to-one basis as described above.) Is set as the first volume level and the first light intensity level (for example, stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122), and the set first volume is set. The volume and the light quantity may be set as the initial volume and the initial light quantity based on the stage and the first light quantity stage (for example, stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122). The relationship between the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage and the initial volume and the initial light quantity may be determined in advance. The relationship is, for example, the relationship between “A” to “F” and the volume and the light amount, and “0” to “9” and the volume at the second volume level and the second light level level of the initial display shown in FIG. And the relationship with the amount of light. When such a setting is made, after that, an effect is produced with the set initial volume and initial light amount (for example, the audio signal and the illumination signal also specify the set volume and light amount). Executed.

  23, first, the effect control CPU 120 reads the current channel of the setting changeover switch 300, and determines whether the read channel has changed from before (step S701). For example, the production control CPU 120 reads the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 every time step S701 is executed. For example, reading is performed by specifying the current channel based on a signal from the setting changeover switch 300. Further, the effect control CPU 120 stores the read channels (data indicating the channels) sequentially in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (stores a predetermined number of channels, and then sequentially updates them from the oldest ones). Good.) For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the channel read in step S701 this time with the channel read in step S701 stored in the RAM 122, and if they are different, the channel has changed. What is necessary is just to determine with (step S701; Yes). In the first step S701 after turning on the power, since there is no channel read in the previous step S701, it may be determined that there has been a change in the channel. Usually, there is no channel switching at this timing. Therefore, it may be determined that there is no channel change.

  When the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 has changed (when the channel has been changed) (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether the channel read in step S701 is “A” to “F”. (Step S702). When the read channel is any one of “A” to “F” (step S702; Yes), the setting is performed according to the state (current channel) of the setting changeover switch 300 (step S703). When the setting changeover switch 300 is any one of “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level and the second light quantity level by the player is limited (in other words, the volume by the player The light intensity adjustment is limited.) For this reason, the volume and the light quantity are set based on the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 (that is, the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage).

  In step S703, the stage corresponding to the channel of the setting switch 300 is set as the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage, and the volume and light quantity corresponding to the set first volume stage and first light quantity stage are set to the actual volume. And the amount of light (for example, setting is performed by preparing and referring to the ROM 121 with a relationship table as shown in FIG. 24). For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A”, “A” is set as the first volume level and the first light level, the actual volume is set to “2”, and the actual light level is set to “30%”. Set. If the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “B”, “B” is set as the first volume level and the first light level, the actual volume is set to “4”, and the actual light level is set to “30%”. . Hereinafter, the setting is performed as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the volume and light quantity are set in step S703, the production is performed with the set volume and light quantity (for example, the audio signal and the illumination signal have the set volume and light quantity). Is specified). Note that the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 may be specified by the channel stored in the RAM 122 in step S701 (hereinafter, the same applies to the specification of the channel). The setting means, for example, that setting target information (such as the first volume level) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and thereafter processing can be performed based on the setting target information (the same applies to the setting). .)

  After step S703, when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is not changed (step S701; No), or when the channel is not “A” to “F” (step S702; No), the process proceeds to step S704. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether a demonstration screen display is currently being executed in the process of step S704 (step S704). When the demonstration screen is being displayed (step S704; Yes), the operation to the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is accepted, so that the operation and the operation content from the push sensor 35B and the tilt direction sensor unit 32 are displayed. It is determined whether or not there has been an operation by the player based on whether or not a signal to be transmitted has been transmitted (step S707).

  When there is an operation by the player (step S707; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the operation is a menu call operation (step S708). For example, the demonstration screen includes an operation image indicating that the menu screen is read out by pressing the push button 31B. The player can call up the menu screen by operating the push button 31B. The effect control CPU 120 is currently displaying the operation image while the demonstration screen is being displayed, and when the player's operation is pressing the push button 31B, the player's operation is a menu call operation. (Step S708; Yes).

  When it is a menu call operation (step S708; Yes), the display control unit 123 is controlled to start displaying the above-described menu screen on the image display device 5 (step S709). The menu screen is displayed, for example, such that the layer of the menu screen is superimposed on the layer of the demo screen. As a result, the display of the demonstration screen is continued behind the menu screen (sound output and the like are also continued). Note that the display of the menu screen and various screens switched from the menu screen (for example, the volume / light quantity setting screen in FIG. 26) are terminated by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols as well as displaying the demonstration screen. When the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F”, the effect control CPU 120 has a menu screen without the “volume / light quantity adjustment” item, or a menu screen with the item darkened. Is displayed so that the item is not highlighted, and the player is notified that the volume / light quantity adjustment is limited.

  After step S709, or when the player's operation is not a menu call operation (step S708; No), the player's operation determined as having been operated is an operation for selecting the “volume / light quantity adjustment” selection item. It is determined whether there is any (step S710). For example, when the item “volume / light quantity adjustment” is currently highlighted on the menu screen, and the player's operation is pressing the push button 31B, the player's operation is “volume / light quantity adjustment”. It is determined that the operation is to select a selection item of “light amount adjustment” (step S711; Yes).

  In this case (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to display an initial display (volume) and an initial display (light quantity) corresponding to the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 ( Control for starting display of the setting screen as shown in FIG. 26 is performed (step S712). The relationship between the channel and the initial display is the relationship shown in FIG. 24 (for example, the initial display is displayed by preparing and referring to the ROM 121 with a relationship table shown in FIG. 24). For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “0”, a setting screen including a volume level and a light intensity level with an initial display (volume) “2” and an initial display (light intensity) “30%” is displayed. . For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “5”, a setting screen is displayed in which the initial display (volume) is “10” and the initial display (light quantity) is “50%”. For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “9”, a setting screen including a volume level and a light level step with an initial display (volume) “14” and an initial display (light amount) “100%” is displayed. .

  After step S712, the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume and the amount of light corresponding to the initial display (step S713). For example, the production control CPU 120 sets the stage corresponding to the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 as the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage, and sets the initial display (volume) stage as the second volume stage. The display (light quantity) stage is set as the second light quantity stage. Further, the volume is set based on the set first volume level and second volume level. Further, the light quantity is set based on the set first light quantity stage and second light quantity stage. These settings are made by, for example, preparing a relationship table as shown in FIG. For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “0”, “0” is set as the first volume level and the first light intensity level, “2” is set as the second volume level, and the second light intensity level is set as the second light intensity level. “30%” is set, “2” is set as the volume corresponding to the set first volume level and the second volume level, and “30%” is set as the volume corresponding to the set first light level and the second light level. "Is set. If the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “5”, “5” is set as the first volume level and the first light level, “10” is set as the second volume level, and “50” is set as the second light level. % ”Is set,“ 10 ”is set as the volume corresponding to the set first volume level and the second volume level, and“ 50% ”is set as the volume corresponding to the set first light level level and the second light level level. Set. If the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “9”, “9” is set as the first volume level and the first light level, “14” is set as the second volume level, and “100” is set as the second volume level. % ”,“ 14 ”is set as the volume corresponding to the set first volume level and the second volume level, and“ 100% ”is set as the volume corresponding to the set first light level level and second light level level. Set. The light quantity may be set based on only the second light quantity stage. When such a setting is made, after that, an effect (for example, an audio signal or an illumination signal also specifies the set volume or light amount) is executed with the set volume or light amount. The

  After step S713 or when the player's operation is not an operation for selecting the selection item of “volume / light quantity adjustment” (step S713; No), the player's operation determined as having been operated in the above is the volume or light quantity. It is determined whether the operation is to be changed (step S715). For example, in the setting screen of FIG. 26, when the operation stick of the stick controller 30 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment can be switched. For example, one of the regions 5HH and 5HL is highlighted by changing the color by thickening one of the frames. The highlighted area becomes the operation target area. When the operation stick of the stick controller 30 is tilted in the left-right direction, if the region 5HH is highlighted, the highlighted volume level (second volume level) is changed, and the region 5HL is highlighted. In this case, the highlighted light quantity stage (second light quantity stage) is changed. In FIG. 26, the region 5HL is highlighted. In this state, when the operation stick of the stick controller 30 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the region 5HH is highlighted. The effect control CPU 120 is currently displaying a volume / light quantity setting screen (see FIG. 26), and when the player's operation is an operation of tilting the operation rod of the stick controller 30 in the left-right direction. Then, it is determined that the player's operation is an operation for changing the volume (second volume level) or the light amount (second light level) (step S708; Yes).

  When the player's operation is an operation for changing the sound volume (second sound volume step) or the light amount (second light amount step) (step S708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 highlights according to the operation content. Display control is performed to change the current volume level (second volume level) or the light level (second light level) (step S716). For example, when the player's operation is an operation of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 30 to the left, the highlighted light intensity level and volume level are lowered by one level (if the current level is the lowest level, the lowest level is set). Display control). When the player's operation is an operation of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 30 to the right, the highlighted light quantity level and volume level are increased by one level (if the current level is the highest level, the highest level is maintained). Display control is performed as follows. For example, when the operation rod is tilted to the left in the state of FIG. 26, the highlighted light quantity step (second light quantity step) is changed from “75%” to “50%”. Further, when the tilt operation is performed to the left, the highlighted light intensity level (second light intensity level) remains at “50%” (the minimum light intensity even if the player unintentionally performs the tilt operation). Can be maintained.). For example, when the operation rod is tilted to the right in the state of FIG. 26, the highlighted light quantity step (second light quantity step) is changed from “75%” to “100%”. Further, if the tilt operation is performed to the left, the highlighted light intensity level (second light intensity level) remains at “100%” (the maximum light intensity even if the player unintentionally performs the tilt operation). Can be maintained.).

  After step S716, the CPU 120 for effect control maintains the currently set first volume level or first light quantity level and after the change (here, despite the operation, the highest level or the lowest level is maintained). The volume or light quantity is set based on the highlighted volume level or light quantity stage (step S717). For example, when the highlighted volume level is changed, the changed highlighted volume level is set as a new second volume level, and the first volume level and the newly set second volume level are set. Set a new volume based on it. When the highlighted light quantity stage is changed, the changed emphasized light quantity stage is set as a new second light quantity stage, and based on the first light quantity stage and the newly set second light quantity stage. Set a new light intensity. For example, when the first volume level is “0” and the highlighted volume level is changed from “2” or “4” to “3”, “3” is set as the second volume level, Is set to “3”. For example, when the first volume level is “6” and the highlighted volume level is changed from “13” to “14”, “14” is set as the second volume level and “22” is set as the volume. Set. For example, when the first light quantity level is “6” and the highlighted light quantity level is changed from “75%” to “100%”, “100%” is set as the second light quantity level, Set “100%”. When such a setting is made, after that, an effect (for example, an audio signal or an illumination signal also specifies the set volume or light amount) is executed with the set volume or light amount. The

  After step S717, the effect control CPU 120 has changed the light amount or volume from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of a command (audio signal) to the audio control board 13 (maintained despite the operation). A confirmation sound for notifying is output (step S718). Note that the confirmation sound at this time is the set volume (if the volume is changed, this allows the volume after the change to be confirmed), but the highest level is maintained despite the operation. May be output at the maximum volume. If the minimum level is maintained despite the operation, it may be output at the minimum volume. (To make the confirmation sound easy to understand, output at a volume higher than the minimum volume is performed. May be.) Further, the notification may be performed by lighting or blinking a game effect lamp or a decoration LED instead of or in addition to the confirmation sound. The amount of lighting at this time is a set amount of light (in the case of changing the amount of light, the amount of light after the change can be confirmed by this). When the uppermost stage is maintained despite the operation, the maximum light quantity may be output. If the minimum level is maintained despite the operation, it may be output with the minimum light amount. (In order to make notification by lighting etc. easy to understand, output with a light amount larger than the minimum light amount is possible. May be done.) Note that the light-emitting body for notification may be provided exclusively for the notification. Thereby, the notification can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, for confirmation after the change, at least a confirmation sound may be output when the volume is changed, and at least a notification by lighting or the like may be performed when the light amount is changed.

  After step S718, or when the player's operation is not an operation for changing the volume or the amount of light (step S715; No), the player's operation determined to be an operation is an operation other than the above-described operations. Is determined (step S719). If it is another operation (step S719; Yes), processing according to the other operation is executed (step S720). For example, when the operation screen of the stick controller 30 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, display control is performed to change the highlighted selection item. When the push button 31B is pressed while the menu screen is displayed, display control is performed to switch and display a new screen corresponding to the selection item highlighted at that time. If the operation stick of the stick controller 30 is tilted back and forth while the volume / light quantity adjustment setting screen is displayed, the highlighted area is sequentially changed to one of the area 5HH, the area 5HL, and the item “return to menu”. . When the item “return to menu” is highlighted and the push button 31B is pressed, display control for returning to the menu screen is performed.

  After step S720, when the operation is not another operation (step S719; No), when the demonstration screen is not being displayed (step S704; No), or when there is no operation (step S704; No), the processing ends.

  By such a series of processes, a change in volume and light amount is realized. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed from “0” to “9” during the game, the change of the channel is changed to the volume / light quantity adjustment setting screen (FIG. 26, etc.). Is reflected, and at this time, the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage corresponding to the changed channel are set, and the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage and the initial display (volume) and initial display are displayed. The volume and light amount are changed according to (light amount). If the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed from “A” to “F” during the game, the change is immediately reflected. That is, the first volume level and the first light intensity level corresponding to the changed channel are set immediately. Furthermore, whenever the second volume level or the second light level step in the setting screen is changed by operating the stick controller 30 on the operation stick or the like, the light amount and volume are changed and a confirmation sound is output.

  In this embodiment, with such a configuration, the initial display (volume) and the initial display (light quantity) stage (the initial display of the second volume stage and the second light quantity stage) are in the state of the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 ( The first sound volume stage and the first light quantity stage), the channel state of the setting changeover switch 300 is related to the second sound volume stage and the second light quantity stage. It is easy to grasp the state of the channel of the setting changeover switch 300, and it is difficult for the second volume level and the second light level to be actually displayed to be the same even though the first volume level and the first light level are different. As a result, the actual sound volume and light amount are not easily misidentified, and the sound volume and light amount can be suitably adjusted. In the above embodiment, the initial display (volume) and the initial display (light quantity) are different between when the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are the highest stage and when the first stage is the lowest stage. The actual volume and amount of light are not easily misidentified, and the volume and amount of light can be adjusted appropriately. Further, in the above embodiment, when the initial display (volume) and the initial display (light quantity) are the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage other than the highest stage, the second volume stage (“2” to “ 13 ”) and the second light intensity level (“ 30% ”,“ 65% ”,“ 50% ”,“ 75% ”), and the first volume level and the first light intensity level are the highest levels. In some cases, the second volume level (“14”) or the second light intensity level (“100%”), which is the highest level, is indicated. Can be adjusted. Also, with this configuration, the volume and light quantity do not become larger than the settings at the game shop side, so the game shop side outputs the unintentionally loud sound by setting the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage to the maximum. And lighting with bright light are prevented.

  Further, when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed, the first volume level and the first light level are set for the first time when the setting screen is displayed, and the actual volume and light level are reflected. Timing (The first volume level and the first light level stage cannot be set by the normal player. Therefore, even if the first volume level and the first light level stage are changed, the player may desire the volume and light level before the change. ) Is prevented from being changed (the player intends to change the volume and the amount of light through the display of the setting screen, so there is little inconvenience even if the volume and the amount of light are changed at this time).

  When the first volume level is increased, the initial display (volume) is also increased, so that the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be easily grasped, so that the volume can be adjusted suitably. Since the initial display (light quantity) increases when the first light quantity step increases, the relationship between the first light quantity stage and the second light quantity stage can be easily grasped, so that the light quantity can be suitably adjusted. In addition, since the confirmation sound is output when the second volume level is set, the setting can be confirmed even with the sound at the second volume level, so that the volume can be adjusted appropriately. Since “A” to “F” for restricting adjustment of the player's volume and light amount are prepared as channels of the setting changeover switch 300, the player's volume setting and light amount setting can be restricted, and the game store intends Sound output at a volume that is not possible can be prevented. In addition, during the restriction, the menu screen without the “volume / light quantity adjustment” item is displayed instead of the menu screen with the “volume / light quantity adjustment” item, so the setting of the second volume level is restricted. This can be notified to the player.

  In this embodiment, according to the above configuration, the gaming machine (here, pachinko gaming machine 1) for playing a game, and when the first permission condition for the gaming store is satisfied (here, setting switching) Based on the first operation (when the switch 300 is in an operable state) (here, the channel switching operation of the setting changeover switch 300), one of a plurality of stages is set to the first volume level (here, The first setting means (here, the CPU 120 for effect control that sets the first volume level in step S77) and the second permission condition for the player are set (here, the first volume level) (here, the first volume level) Then, based on the second operation (in this case, the operation of the stick controller 30 on the operation rod) performed when the volume adjustment setting screen as shown in FIG. Is set as a second volume level (here, the first volume level) by a second setting means (here, the effect control CPU 120 for setting the second volume level in step S77) and the first setting means. Audio output control means for outputting sound with a sound volume corresponding to the set first sound volume stage and the second sound volume stage set by the second setting means from a sound output unit (speakers 8L and 8R in this case). (Here, the CPU 120 for effect control that performs effects at the set volume after setting the volume based on the first volume level and the second volume level in step S77), and a display that the player can visually recognize Display means having an area (here, the image display device 5), and display control means for controlling the display means to control display contents displayed in the display area (here, FIG. 26). A volume or display setting screen for adjustment, and effect control for CPU 120) for controlling the display or to change the volume step to be highlighted, the gaming machine is configured with a.

  And in the said embodiment, the said display control means is a stage display which shows the said 2nd volume level when the said 2nd operation is performed by the said structure (Here, one of several volume levels is set to 1st. The area 5HH highlighted as the two sound volume steps) is displayed in the display region (here, the effect control CPU 120 that performs display control for displaying the setting screen for volume adjustment as shown in FIG. 26), and the step display is displayed. The stage display is displayed so that the initial display of the stage display at the time of display differs according to the first volume stage set by the first setting means (see FIG. 24 and the like here) (here Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control for displaying the initial display (volume) on the volume adjustment setting screen as shown in FIG. 26 in accordance with the first volume level. According to such a configuration, the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the initial display of the stage display when the stage display is displayed according to the configuration described above is when the first volume stage set by the first setting means is the highest stage and the lowest stage. The stage display is displayed (here, the initial display (volume) on the setting screen for volume adjustment as shown in FIG. 26 is set to the first volume stage. The effect control CPU 120 performs display control in accordance with the display control. According to such a configuration, the volume can be adjusted suitably. When the first volume level is other than the highest level and the lowest level, the initial display may be the same, or the initial display may be the same for a plurality of levels of the first volume level. Even in such a case, at the time of the highest level and the lowest level, at least misidentification of the volume is not easily recognized, and the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, according to the above configuration, the initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display is the highest stage when the first volume stage set by the first setting means is other than the highest stage. And the second volume level which is the highest level when the first volume level is the highest level (see FIG. 24, etc.). The display is displayed (here, the effect control CPU 120 that performs display control for displaying the initial display (volume) on the volume adjustment setting screen as shown in FIG. 26 in accordance with the first volume level). According to such a configuration, the volume can be adjusted suitably. When the first volume level is other than the highest level, the initial display may be the same, or the initial display may be the same for a plurality of levels of the first volume level. Even in such a case, at the highest stage, at least the misunderstanding of the volume is not easily misidentified, and the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  “Sound output control means for outputting a sound with a sound volume corresponding to the first sound volume level set by the first setting means and the second sound volume level set by the second setting means from a sound output unit” Each time a sound is output, a sound having a volume corresponding to both the first volume level and the second volume level may be output, or during a first period (for example, after the first setting, the second setting During the previous period), at least the sound corresponding to the first volume level is output, and during the second period (for example, during the period after the second setting), at least the sound corresponding to the second volume level is output. You may do. For example, when the actual volume does not depend on the channel (first volume level) of the setting changeover switch 300 as in the relationship shown in FIG. 32 described later, it is normal (for example, when the second operation is performed). The volume is set according to the second volume level, not based on the first volume level, and when the first volume level is set (for example, setting prohibition when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F”) The volume (for example, the above initial volume) may be set according to the first volume level, not based on the second volume level, only when setting the initial volume or the initial light amount when the power is turned on. .

  The “initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display” may be, for example, a stage display that is displayed first after the first volume stage is set by the first setting unit. It may be a stage display that is displayed first after the gaming machine is turned on, or may be a stage display that is displayed first in a single period during which the second operation can be performed. Good (see embodiment above). The initial display when the stage display is displayed for the first time by performing the second operation may indicate the second volume stage before being changed by the second operation. That is, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. May be.

  For example, the stage display may be a display that can specify the second volume stage (the second volume stage that is currently set or the second volume stage that is set in the future), and the second volume stage as shown in FIG. The second volume level may be displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the number of squares. In this case, when a volume adjustment button or the like is provided and the volume adjustment button is operated for the first time during the demonstration, the bar is displayed as an initial display as an initial display, and the subsequent operation of the volume adjustment button (in FIG. 30, Display control may be performed so that the number of squares is increased or decreased (decrease by one in FIG. 30) in accordance with the volume, that is, the operation of lowering the second volume level. In this manner, a dedicated operation unit for adjusting the volume may be provided, and the volume may be adjusted when an operation is performed on the operation unit. As will be described later, the second volume level to be set is the second volume level when the second volume level is set with the enter button or the like after the volume level being displayed (for example, the highlighted volume level) is changed. It is a stage. The stage display may represent, for example, a second volume level (a second volume level currently set or a second volume level set in the future) by a number.

  For example, in the stage display, the second volume stage is displayed as a bar with the number of squares corresponding to the second volume stage as in FIG. 30, and when the volume adjustment button is operated for the first time during the demonstration, the volume adjustment button is displayed. You may make it display initially the bar which increased / decreased the number of squares according to operation (in FIG. 31, operation which decreases a volume, ie, a 2nd volume step) (FIG. 31). In this case, a virtual bar before the increase / decrease may be set as the initial display. As described above, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. It may be.

  “Different according to the first volume level set by the first setting means” means that the second volume level changes in response to at least part of changes that can be taken by the first volume level. It is an expression including that. For example, the second volume level may be changed by one level every time the first volume level changes by one level, or may change by one level when the first volume level changes by a plurality of levels. That is, the first volume level and the second volume level do not have to change one to one. For example, as shown in FIG. 32, the channel (in this case, the first volume level) of the setting changeover switch 300 may be associated with the initial display or the actual volume range on a one-to-one basis, as shown in FIG. Thus, one initial display or volume may be assigned to a plurality of channels (here, also the first volume level). Also, as shown in FIG. 34, the actual volume range may be shifted for each of a plurality of channels (here, also the first volume level). The plurality of channels and the first volume level correspond one-to-one in the above-described embodiment and the like, but may not be one-to-one if there is a certain correspondence. For example, one first volume level may be assigned to a plurality of channels.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, with the above configuration, the display control means causes the second volume level indicated by the initial display to be higher as the first volume level set by the first setting means is higher. (See FIG. 24 here). According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be easily grasped, so that the volume can be adjusted suitably. Note that the second volume level of the initial display may be decreased as the first volume level is increased. For example, when the actual volume range is higher as the first volume level is higher, the volume level is suddenly reduced by lowering the second volume level of the initial display as the first volume level is higher. Can be prevented from becoming large.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, the sound output control means is a confirmation sound indicating that the second sound volume setting is newly set when the second sound volume level is newly set by the second setting means. Is output from the audio output unit, and when the first volume level is newly set by the first setting means, a confirmation sound indicating that the new volume level is newly set is not output from the audio output unit (here, In step S77, the effect control CPU 120 controls the output of the confirmation sound when the second volume level is set, but does not control the output of the confirmation sound when the first volume level is set. According to such a configuration, since the setting can be confirmed even with sound in the second volume stage, the volume can be adjusted suitably. Note that the confirmation sound may always be a fixed volume regardless of the change in volume set above (in the above embodiment, the volume is changed). Similarly, for example, a predetermined notification sound such as a warning sound when abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (notification sound that is not related to the production and needs to be notified to the game store side) is also fixed. It is good to do. This can prevent the notification sound from being lowered by the player.

  The plurality of stages that can be taken by the first volume stage set by the first setting means includes a limiting stage that restricts the second setting means from setting the second volume stage (here, the first volume stage). The first sound volume stage includes “A” to “F”), and the gaming machine sets the second setting means when the restriction stage is set as the first sound volume stage by the first setting means. Setting restriction means for restricting the setting of the second volume level (in this case, when “A” to “F” are set as the first volume level, an item of “volume / light quantity adjustment”) In such a configuration, it is possible to limit the player's volume setting, and to prevent sound output at a volume that is not intended by the game store.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, with the above configuration, the display control means allows the second permission when the setting restriction is performed by the setting restriction means during a period when the second permission condition is satisfied. A corresponding image corresponding to the condition being satisfied (here, a menu screen having an item of “volume / light quantity adjustment”) is displayed in the display area, and when the setting restriction is not performed, the corresponding image is displayed. No display is made in the display area (in this case, control is performed to display a menu screen without the “volume / light quantity adjustment” item instead of the menu screen with the item “volume / light quantity adjustment”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the setting of the second volume level is restricted. In the above embodiment, the volume and the light amount are limited, but either one may be limited. Moreover, you may restrict | limit either or both of a volume and a light quantity according to a channel. When restricting one, it is only necessary not to display the restriction mode area on the setting screen as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the said setting restriction | limiting is performed by the said setting restriction | limiting means, you may make it further provide the predetermined | prescribed effect execution means which performs a predetermined | prescribed effect according to having performed said 2nd operation. For example, when the second operation is performed when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F” (here, the volume adjustment button is pressed, or the selection item of “volume / light quantity adjustment” is selected) Is displayed on the menu screen, and an operation for selecting a selection item of “volume / light quantity adjustment” is performed), the effect control CPU 120 controls the sound control board 13 to control the volume. Control the output of warning sound such as buzzer sound that cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the setting of the second volume level is restricted. Instead of or in addition to a warning sound such as a buzzer sound, a display indicating that the volume cannot be changed may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, instead of or in addition to the display, the notification may be performed by lighting or blinking a game effect lamp, a decoration LED, or the like. The volume of the warning sound and the amount of light for lighting may be a set volume or amount of light, or may be a fixed volume or amount of light that is equal to or greater than a predetermined level (for example, maximum). Note that the light-emitting body for notification may be provided exclusively for the notification. Thereby, the notification can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the second setting means clears the second volume level being set at a predetermined timing (here, when it can be determined that the player has changed), and performs an initial setting stage (here, initial display ( Volume)) is set as the second volume level, and the first volume level set by the first setting means is changed only based on the first operation (here, the setting changeover switch 300 is physically It is not necessary to reset because it is a simple switch).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the process of FIG. 27 at a predetermined timing in the volume setting process. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the player has changed (step S751). For example, (A) a game in which a reserved memory has not occurred for a certain period, a menu screen has not been displayed, a demo screen has been displayed for a certain period, or a game medium has not been fired for a certain period When the player does not proceed for a certain period of time, or (B) when various information such as a two-dimensional code indicating game data is output (performed based on various operations), when the player inputs a predetermined password (Performed based on various operations) A game start item is prepared on the menu screen, and when an operation for selecting this item is performed, a game start instruction operation (such as password input or start selection) Etc.) or a game end instruction operation (such as an operation for outputting various information), it is determined that the player has been changed. 35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams of a configuration using game data. At the end of the game, the player operates the stick controller 30 or the like while looking at the menu screen and designates the output of a two-dimensional code (indicating game data of the current game). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a screen for outputting a two-dimensional code as shown in FIG. 36 on the image display device 5. The two-dimensional code is read by a player's mobile phone 901 or the like, and the data indicated by the two-dimensional code is transmitted to a predetermined management server 900 via the Internet or the like. The management server 900 manages the data for each player, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the accumulation of the data (for example, the number of clear missions exceeds the predetermined number), the player can view videos that are usually difficult to see. Distributed to the mobile phone 901. In this way, a privilege is granted. As various information, a password having contents corresponding to the game may be output instead of the two-dimensional code at the end of the game, and the player may input the password at the start of the game. By inputting the password, for example, the production mode may be changed, or it may be possible to change that the normal volume or light amount cannot be changed. In this way, a privilege may be granted.

  If there is a change of the player (step S751; Yes), it is determined whether the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F” (step S752), and if it is not “A” to “F” Since the player's volume and light amount adjustment is not restricted, the initial setting corresponding to the state of the setting changeover switch is performed (step S753). In the initial setting, the volume and the amount of light corresponding to the state (channel) of the setting changeover switch are set, but the relationship between the channel and the volume and the amount of light may be determined in advance. For example, in the initial setting, the same processing as that for setting the initial volume and the initial light amount when the power is turned on (see above) may be performed.

  When there is no change of the player (step S751; No), when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is “A” to “F” (step S752; Yes), after step S753, other processing such as volume setting processing is performed. Or the volume setting process is terminated.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being performed while the second volume level set by the second setting means is unintentionally dragged (particularly against the player's intention).

  In the above embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, the volume setting is not backed up. Therefore, the volume is initially set when the power is restored, but the volume once set is backed up for a certain period of time ( For example, a backup RAM may be provided), and the backed up volume may be reset when the power is turned on again. When it is determined that the player has been changed as described above when the power is turned on again, initial setting or the like may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, the gaming machine can perform the first operation at any one of a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of stages that the first volume stage can take as an operation target of the first operation. An operating device (here, a setting changeover switch 300) having a physically displacing portion is provided, and the first setting means has the first volume level corresponding to the position of the displacing portion displaced by the first operation. Is set as the first volume level based on the first operation (here, the effect control CPU 120 that sets the first volume level according to the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 in step S77), and the audio output control means When the step display is displayed by the display control means after the position of the displacement portion is changed, the first setting means newly The sound output unit starts to output a sound having a sound volume corresponding to the set first sound volume stage (here, when the setting screen is displayed after the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is changed in step S77). The CPU 120 for effect control sets the volume in accordance with the new first volume level. With such a configuration, the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  The “position of the displacement portion” at which the first volume level is set may be any one of a plurality of positions where the displacement portion can be located, or the displacement portion is located. It may be any one of all the obtained multiple positions. In this way, an operation unit such as the setting changeover switch 300 may be configured. Further, “when the stage display is displayed by the display control means” is a timing at which the stage display is determined to be displayed in addition to a predetermined timing and a stage display timing during a period in which the stage display is displayed ( For example, it includes the timing at which it is determined that there has been an operation for displaying a stage display, as determined as Yes at step S710. In this case, for example, steps S712 and S713 are interchanged. It also includes a predetermined timing during a period from when the stage display is displayed. The effect control CPU 120 may set the volume at any one of these timings, for example. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when a predetermined event occurs.

  For example, the sound output control means may be newly set by the first setting means when the second volume level set by the second setting means is changed after the position of the displacement portion is changed. You may make it start outputting the audio | voice of the sound volume according to the set said 1st sound volume step from the said audio | voice output part. For example, the change of the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 (change of the first volume level) and the change of the volume due to the change (that is, the reflection of the volume) are performed during the volume change operation (for example, at the second volume level). It may be at the time of setting. Note that the change in the first volume level may be performed internally, and the change in the actual volume may be reflected at the time of the volume change operation (for example, when the second volume level is set). For example, when the channel of the setting changeover switch 300 is configured to be input to a predetermined input port such as the effect control CPU 120 when the channel is switched, the input content is not changed when the effect control CPU 120 changes the channel but when the channel is changed. For example, setting the second volume level based on the read content and setting the volume may be reflected in the change of the volume (setting of the volume), or the effect control CPU 120 may The second volume level is set based on the input content read in software (reading is performed at the time of channel switching) (either at the time of channel switching or at the time of changing operation), and at the time of the changing operation. For example, setting the volume based on the second volume level may reflect the change in volume (setting the volume). Note that “when the second volume level set by the second setting means is changed” means that the second volume level is set when the second operation is performed (during the second operation) or when the second operation is performed. It may be when it is newly set (when the second volume level is set, etc.).

Note that the above configuration may be applied to the amount of light in addition to or instead of the volume.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the volume level and the light level to be highlighted change even if the volume and the light level are changed, but the volume and the light level are set until the setting operation is performed. It may not be performed. For example, on the setting screen as shown in FIG. 29, the player changes the volume level and the light intensity level to be highlighted by operating the stick controller 30, and finally the push button 31B is pressed. By this pressing, the CPU 120 for effect control may set the second volume level and the second light level according to the volume level and the light level that are highlighted at that time, and set the volume and the light level. (In this case, the volume level and the light intensity level to be highlighted and the regions 5HH and 5HL indicate the second volume level and the second light intensity level to be set in the future). For example, as shown in FIG. 28, when a volume determination operation or a light amount determination operation (pressing the push button 31B) is performed, the change of the volume or the light amount may be set. Further, as shown in FIG. 28, even when the setting changeover switch is operated, the operation is not reflected at the start of display of the setting screen, and the volume display changing operation (that is, the operation for changing the highlighted volume level) is performed. ), The first volume level may be set when changing. In addition, when there is an operation for changing the light amount display (that is, an operation for changing the light amount step for highlighting), the first light amount step may be set. Note that the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are set before that (for example, at the time of channel operation), and at the time of change operation, the volume change and the light quantity based on the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are set. Change settings may be made. These changes may be set at the time of determining the volume and the amount of light. In this case, the volume and light amount are set using the second sound volume step and the second light amount step.

The present invention can be further modified and applied to the above-described embodiments and the like. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment and the like, and the one described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Below, the modification of the said embodiment is shown. You may combine at least one part about each of the following modification.
(Modification 1)
In the above embodiment, the setting changeover switch 300 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the game store side. However, the operation means may be the stick controller 30 or the like. As the time during which the operation is performed, the first volume level and the first light quantity level may be set by the stick controller 30 or the like within the predetermined period. That is, the operation target of the first operation and the operation target of the second operation may be the same. In place of the setting changeover switch 300, a jog dial, a cross key, or the like may be provided as an operation means. Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player side may be a dedicated operation device for setting the volume and light amount, such as a changeover switch, a jog dial, and a cross key. The adjustment of the amount of light may be performed by an operation device different from the adjustment of the volume. In the above-described embodiment, the setting changeover switch 300 (knob) is provided as “an operation device including a displacement portion that is physically displaced by the first operation at any one of a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of stages that the first sound volume stage can take”. 301 is an example of a displacement portion.) However, in the operation device, a rotary fader, a jog dial, or a displacement portion (knob or the like) in which the displacement portion (knob or the like) rotates moves in the vertical or horizontal direction. It may be a linear fader or the like. Displacement includes rotation, movement in the up-down direction, and left-right direction. The displacement unit may be one that moves stepwise like the setting changeover switch 300, or one that moves continuously (for example, a fader). Further, the position where the displacement part is displaced (in the case of rotation, it may be expressed by a rotation angle, etc.) and the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of stages that the first volume stage can take correspond one-to-one. It does not have to be. For example, one stage among a plurality of stages that can be taken by the first volume stage may be set in correspondence with a plurality of positions where the displacement unit can be displaced. The sound output unit only needs to output sound, and may be speakers 8R and 8L.
(Modification 2)
The operation of the operating means that can be operated by the amusement shop is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be performed at any time. That is, the first permission condition may always be satisfied. The first permission condition is a condition for a game shop. When this condition is satisfied, in principle, an operation is performed by an employee of a game shop (such as a game hall where a gaming machine is set). It is assumed that. The operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player side (that is, the operation of changing the second volume step and the second light amount step to change the volume and the light amount) can be performed in the big hit gaming state, during the variable display of the decorative symbols, etc. Or you can do it at any time. That is, the second permission condition may always be satisfied. Note that the second permission condition is a condition for a player, and when this condition is satisfied, it is assumed that, in principle, an operation is performed by a player (exceptionally an employee of a game store). May be operated for business purposes.) For example, in the big hit gaming state, the type of music (BGM, etc.) that flows during the big hit can be selected according to the forward / backward tilting operation of the operating stick of the stick controller 30, and the right / left tilting operation of the operating stick can be selected. Thus, the volume and light quantity (second volume stage and second light quantity stage) may be changed. Thus, by accepting the change operation during the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state according to the player's preference is realized. Also, for example, during variable display, when a specific effect is being performed, the volume and light amount (second volume step and second light amount step) are changed according to the tilting operation of the operation stick in the left-right direction. May be. As a result, the volume and amount of light at the time of execution of a specific effect can be changed according to the player's preference. Further, when a specific effect is not performed, the volume and the light amount (second volume step and second light amount step) may be changed according to the tilting operation of the operation stick in the left-right direction. This is particularly effective when the specific effect is an effect that accepts an operation to the same operation unit as the operation unit for changing the volume and the amount of light. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation part from being subjected to both operations. In addition, when a change in volume or light amount is received during the execution of an effect that accepts an operation on the operation unit, an operation unit for changing the volume or light amount and a production operation unit may be provided separately. This prevents duplication of operation.
(Modification 3)
In the case where the player adjusts the volume and light amount, the volume and light amount may be minimized or maximized. Moreover, when limiting, you may make it transfer to power saving mode. In the above-described embodiment, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is changed, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is the highest level, the highest level is maintained by performing an operation to increase the level. However, you may make it move to the minimum step. In the above-described embodiment, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is changed, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is the lowest level, the lowest level is maintained by performing an operation to lower the level. However, it may be shifted to the maximum stage.
(Modification 4)
In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, one change pattern command is used when starting change. Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.
(Modification 5)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.
(Modification 6)
The technical idea in the above embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines for playing games. For example, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which a predetermined game value can be given based on a game result by launching a game ball as a game medium into a game area, and for example, a plurality of types of identification information It is also possible to apply the present invention to an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of a symbol and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result. More specifically, by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, the game can be started and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be individually identified can be changed. A display result of a variable display device (for example, a plurality of reels) to be displayed is derived and displayed, and one game is completed. According to the display result, a prize (for example, a cherry prize, a watermelon prize, a bell prize, a replay prize, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that can generate a prize, an RB prize, or the like. For example, as with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a slot machine that can perform volume adjustment and light quantity adjustment. Even in these gaming machines, operation means for a game store (operation means for setting the first volume level or the like) may be provided on a board for effect control inside the housing, etc. Operate the player's operating means (operating means used for the progress of the game, operating means for setting the second volume level, etc.) that the player usually operates during the period, etc., as the operating means for the game store. May be. The player side volume setting (change of the second volume level, etc.) can be executed, for example, while the demo screen is being displayed (period in which the game is not being executed). Also, when the replay is established and the game is ended, the BET is automatically performed, so the volume setting or the like may be limited. The volume may be adjusted with a jog dial, a process adjustment button, a stick controller, a slot machine lever, a stop button, or the like. When adjusting the volume or the like, the setting screen may be displayed from the menu screen or the like as in the above embodiment, and the screen may be adjusted according to the operation of a dedicated operation unit such as an adjustment button. The step display may be displayed.

  As for the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that the process (S29 in FIG. 5) of outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by such an information output process may include a winning information signal that can identify the winning opening where the game ball has won and the number of winning.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a first start winning opening (ordinary winning ball apparatus 6A), a second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B), and a large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7). There are various types of prize winning openings. Then, the winning of the game balls in these winning holes is detected by a winning detection switch such as the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, and the detection signal is detected by the game control microcomputer 100. Is input.

  The game control microcomputer 100 can perform processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on a detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. Then, the game control microcomputer 100, based on such winning information, every time a predetermined period elapses, a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball has won in each predetermined period. Is output from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 11 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  As described above, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening of the gaming balls won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Second Embodiment]
As a second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having the game control as an example of the game control such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment is configured as a sealed circulation pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine An example of a system for managing the card unit and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the second embodiment below may be applied to any of the gaming machine and card unit described as the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc., and uses a server installed in a game hall and a gaming value owned by the player. The present invention relates to a gaming system, a gaming device, a gaming machine, a gaming board, and a gaming frame, each having a gaming device that enables gaming by a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, as a means for authenticating whether or not a main control board of a gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine installed in a game hall is appropriate, the chip ID of the main control board is sent to the center via an in-ground management device. There is a transmission to the management device, and the center management device checks whether or not the transmitted chip ID matches a regular chip ID stored in advance (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-26883). 2010-162425).

  The timing at which the chip ID is registered in the center management apparatus is generally performed before the time when the gaming machine equipped with the chip ID is installed in the game hall, but the timing may be delayed. In this case, even if the gaming machine is installed in the game hall, the chip ID cannot be collated, so that the gaming machine cannot be operated, resulting in a disadvantage to the gaming hall. Therefore, it is possible to perform a timed operation in which the gaming machine is operated in a timely manner without checking with the chip ID registered in the center management device.

  However, if the gaming machine is operated using the timed operation for a long time without collating with the chip ID registered in the center management apparatus, there is a problem that the security is lowered as compared with the original operating state. Similarly, when a gaming machine is originally operated by acquiring an encryption key from a higher-level center management device, the gaming machine should be operated for a long period of time using a cryptographic key given to the factory shipment. As a result, there was a problem of lowering security. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraud such as intentionally avoiding connection with the center management apparatus and intentionally using the timed operation to operate the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to prevent unauthorized use of the timed operation function, while preventing a game system from being hindered from operating, a stable gaming system, a gaming device, Enables the operation of gaming machines, game boards and game slots.

(1) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player A gaming system including a gaming device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player,
Including a management device (for example, key management server 800F shown in FIG. 41) in which authentication information used for authenticating the validity of the gaming device is stored;
The gaming device is:
When the authentication information stored in the management device cannot be received, an operation permission means for permitting the gaming machine to perform a timed operation that allows a game under a predetermined restriction (from the key management server 800F). If the health check request is not reached to the CU control unit 323F, the timed operation function is permitted),
State monitoring request receiving means for receiving a state monitoring request for monitoring the state of the gaming machine and the gaming device at a predetermined timing from the management device (FIG. 89: key for monitoring the state of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F) Send a health check request from the management server 800F),
When the state that the state monitoring request receiving unit cannot receive the state monitoring request satisfies an invalid condition (for example, a state where the health check request does not reach the CU control unit 323F for 10 days), the operation permission unit The timed operation permitted for the timed operation is invalidated (FIG. 89: SC325bF invalidates the use of the timed operation function).

  According to the above configuration, if the state in which the state monitoring request receiving unit cannot receive the state monitoring request satisfies the invalid condition, the timed operation permitted for the gaming machine is invalidated. It is possible to limit operation so that it cannot be used for a long period of time, preventing unauthorized use of the timed operation function, and enabling stable operation of gaming systems and gaming devices that do not interfere with game hall operations can do.

(2) In (1) above,
The operation permission means includes
When the state monitoring request receiving means is able to receive the state monitoring request when the return condition (for example, the state in which the health check request has reached the CU control unit 323F is 3 days) is invalidated for the gaming machine The timed operation permission is enabled (FIG. 90: SC325bF enables the use of the timed operation function).

  According to the above configuration, if the state in which the state monitoring request receiving unit can receive the state monitoring request satisfies the return condition, the timed operation permission is enabled. The timed operation can be automatically restored without performing individual operations.

(3) In (2) above,
The invalid condition is that the period during which the state monitoring request receiving unit cannot receive the state monitoring request has reached the first period, and the return condition is that the state monitoring request receiving unit has a period during which the state monitoring request can be received. The second period (for example, the health check request has not reached the CU control unit 323F for 10 days) is the second period (for example, the health check request has been transmitted to the CU control unit 323F). It is assumed that the state of reaching the period is longer than 3 days).

  According to the above configuration, since the second period of the return condition is longer than the first period of the invalid condition, the timed operation function is difficult to be invalidated, and the timed operation function can be easily activated even if invalid. Thus, it is possible to operate the CU 3F and the P stand 2F more stably without preventing illegal use of the timed operation function and not hindering the business of the game hall.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
First control means (CU control unit 323F or CU3F, P stand 2F, jet counter, POS terminal, etc.) and second control means (security chip 325bF or CU3F, communicatively connected to the first control means) P stand 2F, jet counter, POS terminal, etc.)
Mutual authentication processing means (substrate initial key authentication sequence in FIG. 72) for performing mutual authentication processing using a temporary authentication key (substrate initial key) between the first control means and the second control means;
An authentication key acquisition unit (FIG. 69: acquired from the key management server) that performs a process of acquiring the authentication key (substrate authentication key) on condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication processing unit is appropriate;
An operation processing means (business message communication with the gaming machine of FIG. 73) for executing an operation process using the authentication key acquired by the authentication key acquisition means;
Temporary operation processing means for executing temporary operation processing using the temporary authentication key when the authentication key cannot be acquired as a result of processing by the authentication key acquiring means (FIG. 72: board serial ID authentication) The communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key without executing the sequence and the device authentication sequence.

  According to the above configuration, since the process for obtaining the authentication key is executed on the condition that the mutual authentication process is performed using the temporary authentication key and the authentication result is appropriate, high security can be ensured. It becomes possible. In addition, when the authentication key cannot be acquired as a result of the acquisition process of the authentication key, a temporary operation process is executed using the temporary authentication key. It is possible to prevent inconveniences that cannot be achieved at all.

(5) In the above (1) to (3),
Including a server (a hall server in FIG. 69) installed at a game hall and having a game hall identification information transmitting means for transmitting game hall identification information for identifying the game hall to the gaming device;
The server transmits game hall identification information (unified store code) for identifying the game hall in which the server is installed to the gaming device (transmits the unified store code of FIG. 69). Including a hall server CPU and input / output interface)
The gaming device is:
Authentication processing means (substrate initial key / shipping key authentication in FIG. 76, communication control IC authentication sequence using temporary authentication key in FIG. 83) for performing authentication processing using temporary authentication data (substrate initial key, temporary authentication key); ,
On the condition that the authentication result by the authentication processing means is proper, the main authentication data acquisition storage means (the board authentication key in FIG. 69 is used for acquiring and storing the main authentication data (board authentication key, main authentication key)). 72 and 73, SF 211 and SF 212 in FIG. 85 (a), SF 224 in FIG. 86 (a), and the CU control unit in FIG. 69. SC for generating and storing an authentication key, SF216 and SF217 in FIG. 85 (b), SF226 and SF227 in FIG. 86 (b),
This authentication processing means for executing authentication processing using the main authentication data stored in the main authentication data acquisition storage means (substrate authentication key authentication in FIG. 77, communication control IC using the main authentication key in FIG. 83) Authentication sequence) and
Match determination means (SF1102 in FIG. 87) for comparing the game hall identification information transmitted this time from the game hall identification information transmission means and the game hall identification information transmitted last time to determine whether they match. ,
The authentication data stored in the authentication data acquisition and storage means is erased when the match determination means determines that they do not match in the state where the authentication processing by the authentication processing means is executed, and the book Authentication processing switching means (SF1104, SF1105 in FIG. 87) for switching from authentication processing using authentication data to authentication processing using temporary authentication data.

  According to the above configuration, in order to perform authentication processing using the temporary authentication data and the main authentication data stored in the gaming device itself, there is no need to inquire and authenticate the center management device every time authentication is performed. Inconveniences that cause complications can be prevented. Further, when the gaming device is moved to another game hall, the game hall identification information for identifying the game hall transmitted this time from the game hall identification information transmitting means, and the game hall identification information transmitted last time, Is determined by the match determination means, the authentication data stored in the authentication data acquisition storage means is erased, and the authentication process using the authentication data is used for the temporary authentication data. Switched to authentication processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the main authentication data used before the relocation is leaked at the relocation destination game arcade, and security can be ensured by an authentication process using temporary authentication data.

(6) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player A gaming device (CU3F, paging lamp device, etc.) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player,
When the authentication information stored in the management device (for example, the key management server 800F shown in FIG. 41) storing the authentication information used for authenticating the validity of the gaming device cannot be received, Operation permitting means for permitting the gaming machine to perform a timed operation that allows a game under restriction (FIG. 89: Permit timed operation function when a health check request from the key management server 800F does not reach the CU control unit 323F And)
State monitoring request receiving means for receiving a state monitoring request for monitoring the state of the gaming machine and the gaming device at a predetermined timing from the management device (FIG. 89: key for monitoring the state of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F) Send a health check request from the management server 800F),
When the state that the state monitoring request receiving unit cannot receive the state monitoring request satisfies an invalid condition (for example, a state where the health check request does not reach the CU control unit 323F for 10 days), the operation permission unit The timed operation permitted for the timed operation is invalidated (FIG. 89: SC325bF invalidates the use of the timed operation function).

  According to the above configuration, if the state in which the state monitoring request receiving unit cannot receive the state monitoring request satisfies the invalid condition, the timed operation permitted for the gaming machine is invalidated. By restricting operation so that it cannot be used for a long period of time, it is possible to operate a stable gaming system and gaming device that does not interfere with the operation of the game hall while preventing unauthorized use of the timed operation function Can do.

(7) The present invention provides a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that grants a predetermined gaming point upon occurrence of a prize, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables the game of
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 42: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 51). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 51: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the game points to the points (FIG. 51: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 37: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 51: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(8) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2F, S 2SF) that gives a predetermined game point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using storage balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID (card ID) or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by card insertion notification in FIG. 45). Notification)
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 45: backup card ID) for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means;
When the game is finished, transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (FIG. 51: P table 2F is backed up by a card return response). Send C-ID)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 42);
Conversion request transmission means (FIG. 51: FIG. 51) for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point based on an operation (counting) for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point. P base 2F transmits a count request = ON state information request)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, a conversion process for converting the gaming points into the holding points is executed (FIG. 51: the number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls), and the conversion is performed. Conversion processing means for returning a conversion approval indicating that the request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 51: Sending a count response = ON state information request);
Identical determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means Means (FIG. 51: determination of coincidence between C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3F side and C-ID notified by the card return response).

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(9) The present invention is an information management device (for example, CU3F, Hallcon 900F, call lamp) capable of communicating with a gaming machine that can play a game by launching a game medium to the game area,
A signal (for example, a status information response indicating the launch intensity) output from the gaming machine and a first area where the game medium is provided in the game area (e.g., normal winning holes 272F to 274F). , A signal indicating that the vehicle has passed a large winning opening 271F, a starting winning opening 275F to 277F, a normal symbol gate, or one of a plurality of areas including at least one of the stage inlets (for example, a passing area) State information response) and a second area where the game medium is provided in the gaming area (for example, at least one of a normal winning port 272F to 274F, a big winning port 271F, a starting winning port 275F to 277F, a normal symbol gate, or a stage entrance) A signal indicating that the signal has passed through one of the plurality of regions including the first region and a region different from the first region (for example, Acquisition means for acquiring the status information response) indicating the passage region and (SF610 in Figure 107),
Using the signal received by the acquisition means, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are each determined as the firing strength. A tally means (for example, SF 613 in FIG. 107) that performs tally processing for tallying separately is provided.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are tabulated for each firing strength. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which area the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity (ease of passing through each area according to the launch intensity). In addition, when grasping | ascertaining the ease of passage of each area | region according to discharge | release intensity | strength, you may make it compare the frequency | count of a 1st area | region and the passage ratio of a 2nd area | region, for example.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes. The card unit will be described below as an example of the gaming device according to the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is connected to the P stand 2F to collect game information such as jackpots and abnormalities, and the number of winnings. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 40) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26F is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27F on the front side. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as launch strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25F (hereinafter also simply referred to as handle manipulation amount), and the handle manipulation amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P stand 2F shown in FIG. 37 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided in the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 37, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls that have won the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  A probable variation winning opening 271aF is arranged in the big winning opening 271F. When the pachinko ball that has won the big prize opening 271F further wins the probability variation prize opening 271aF, the probability that a big hit will occur after the end of the current big hit state is improved (hereinafter also referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability change state). Will occur.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278F becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154F are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Note that the display 54F is formed integrally with the CU (card unit) 3F even if it is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2F independently of the CU (card unit) 3F as shown in FIG. (Pachinko machine) It may be configured to be fitted to the front surface of 2F. If the display unit 54F of the CU3F is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F, the CU3F and the P base 2F can be more strongly connected, and thus fraud can be further prevented. In this case, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the indicator 54F from being released unless the lower door provided with the glass door 6F or the ball hitting operation handle 25F is opened. .

  A 7-segment display 50F is provided below the display 54F. The 7-segment display 50F includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The 7-segment display 50F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28F for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25F on the P platform 2F. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or when the counting button 28F is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F side, it is seated facing the P table 2F as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU (card unit) 3F side. Can improve the operability of the player. In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. Note that the position and number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 37, and the position and number may be changed as necessary.

  A game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28F. The game ball number display 29F is a 7 segment type display. The game ball number display 29F may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26F and another front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, the game store only needs to replace the game board 26F when replacing a new stand.

  A keyhole 10F is provided above the hitting operation handle 25F, and the front frame 5F is opened by inserting a key possessed by a game attendant and unlocking the front frame 5F (for example, rotating clockwise). The glass door 6F is opened by an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) of the glass door (front member) 6F.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 2F is a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko machine 1 described above as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed by the pachinko machine 2F. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305F described above, on the surface facing the player, the display card 312F and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card when the membership card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319F for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to savings ball withdrawal.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU 3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 38, the P base 2F opens and closes a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6F with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4F with the left edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6aF and 6bF are provided near the edge of the front frame 5F opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF of the outer frame 4F. When the open front frame 5F is pressed against the outer frame 4F, the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF get over the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF, and the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10F shown in FIG. 37 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), whereby a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aF against the biasing force of the spring, 6bF is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aF and 6bF are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF to be in the unlocked state, and the front frame 5F is released.

  Further, the front frame 5F is also provided with an engaging protrusion 8F for the glass door 6F, and an engaging hole 9F is provided in the glass door 6F portion facing the engaging protrusion 8F. The engaging protrusion 8F is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engaging protrusion 8F is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 9F by pressing the opened glass door 6F against the front frame 5F. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8F is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F are engaged to be in a locked state. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10F shown in FIG. 37 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), thereby raising the engaging protrusion 8F against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6F is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4F in the lower portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected that the front frame 5F has been opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12F is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6F in the upper portion of the front frame 5F, and the glass door open detection switch 12F detects that the glass door 6F has been opened.

  The number of opening times of the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F is counted by a counting counter 120F shown in FIG. 99 (b). The counting counter 120F is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. Even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are detected open. It is possible to count the number of times and transmit the count value to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  A main control board 16F is provided on the back surface of the game board 26F (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6F). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4F is closed, the main control board 16F can be detached from the game board 26F by first opening the front frame 5F and removing the game board 26F from the front frame 5F. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16F from the game board 26F or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, it is necessary to open the front frame 5F, so the front frame opening detection switch 13F is used. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16F is illegally removed from the game board 26F, or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17F is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F. The payout control board 17F also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F after first opening the front frame 5F. Therefore, if the payout control board 17F is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F or the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26F in the front frame 5F is demonstrated. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the state before and after the game board 26F is attached to the front frame 5F. As shown in FIG. 39, attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35aF and 35bF, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF have a square shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26F. By pushing the game board 26F in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 39B with respect to the front frame 5F, the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF as shown in FIG. 39A. When the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side. Here, the convex-type drawer connector 32F and the concave-type drawer connector 33F are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F, the convex drawer connector 32F is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F, so that the main control board 16F on the game board 26F side and the payout control board on the front frame 5F side. 17F is connected. Further, the game board 26F is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33F. Even if the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F with only the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F without the mounting mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26F and the front frame 5F. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the main control board 16F via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26F, and the concave drawer connector 33F is a payout shown in FIG. 38 via the signal cable 36F. It is connected to the control board 17F.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the CU 3F and the P platform 2F. With reference to FIG. 40, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 41) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323F is a security board (SC board) 325F for communicating with the payout control board 17F of the P platform 2F while ensuring security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU 3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side are connected to be communicable via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 41) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the P stand 2F. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2F is input to the display 312F via the relay board 14F. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display 312F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F has a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the firing motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A launch control board 31F, a variable display device 278F, and an effect control board 15F that controls display of the variable display device 278F based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16F.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. The game control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  The main control unit 161F draws random numbers for determining big hits (or further including small hits) / off when the balls win the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, and stores the random numbers. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278F can start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F as commands.

  The command related to variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / miss), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and an occurrence of a gaming state error. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151F controls display of the variable display device 278F according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F on the front frame 5F side. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. Is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the CU3F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the P platform 2F side is connected to the relay board 14F provided on the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame 5F. On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, the discharge ball detection switch 903F, the out ball detection switch 701F, the foul ball detection switch 33AFF, the counting button 28F, the radio wave sensor 173F, the glass door opening detection switch 12F, and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. Are provided in a connected state. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power source even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. The number of times the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are detected open even when the power is turned off at night or the like. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  From main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33AF, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325F to the payout control board 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F, as will be described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17F, the front frame 5F is provided with a relay board 14F, a launch control board 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number display 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, but the front frame 5F is similar to an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29F.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18F of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F. The firing control board 31F emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18F when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19F detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18F. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19F detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19F is output to the payout control board 17F and the CU 3F via the launch control board 31F.

  A display 54F is provided on the front frame 5F. The display unit 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F via the relay board 14F. Further, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  The relay board 14F outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15F and the display controller 350F to the display 54F, and the display 54F is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15F or the display controller 350F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the display 54F on the P stand 2F side is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54F is controlled to be displayed on the P stand 2F side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2F. After the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. 40, the circulation path of the pachinko balls in the P platform 2F will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. Thereby, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on a payout control board 17F (see FIG. 40) provided with a payout control unit 171F. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27F, the out balls that have entered the out port 154F (see FIG. 37) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided in the middle of the ball. . The foul ball flows down through the foul ball return path and is detected by a foul ball detection switch 33AF provided in the middle of the foul ball.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903F is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, all the winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the firing ball detection switch 903F. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the pachinko balls that are bulleted. When the number detected by this switch is equal to the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18F, it can be determined that all of the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the shot ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference number is not 0, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27F have been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it is possible to determine whether the game area 27F is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for describing notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 41, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security board 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control board 16F, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another illegally manufactured product, or may malfunction or break down due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 41 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security board 325F of the CU 3F, the CU control part 323F detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323F and the security board 325F described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325bF when the security chip 325bF of the security board 325F is manufactured. When the CU3F is loaded into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. The

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F of the fact and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F controls the display 312F to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350F to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of the signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. In response, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, main control board 16F performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security control unit 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F to that effect, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F of the fact. The notification destination of the abnormality occurrence by the security board 325F is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the security board 325F has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout controller 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325F notifies the main control board 16F accordingly. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for abnormality notification similar to that described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is detected by the security board 325F, the fact that the abnormality has occurred is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. Notify the hall server 801F that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has occurred, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17F detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16F when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, and informs the main control board 16F of the abnormality when the abnormality occurs. Detected and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325F described above, the payout control board 17F is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, an abnormality notification function may be provided in the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P stand 2F side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 42, main data among various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P stand (pachinko machine) 2F side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the P ball 2F side calculates the variation in the number of game balls, and stores and manages the current latest number of game balls. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of accumulated balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 42 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID (payout control) stored in the payout control board 17F itself. Chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” on the CU3F side (primary station side). However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The P station 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3F requests the P platform 2F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count game balls.

  Only the CU3F has a normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3F stores the normal serial number as a backup and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3F transmits an addition sequence number obtained by adding 1 to the addition sequence number used for communication to the P unit 2F. The P base 2F returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P platform 2F has the addition update right of the counting sequence number. When making a count request, the P platform 2F transmits a count sequence number added to the count sequence number that has been used for communication to the CU 3F. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding “normal serial number”, a configuration in which the serial number received by the CU 3F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of the P base 2F and the CU 3F or the P base 2F counts (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number received. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 40) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154F, and the total number of the out balls and the safe balls means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be made by a computer or hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 40) stores the stored balls in response to an input requesting the use of the stored balls (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 40) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 40) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 43 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission count serial number”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F Is matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F If the “store code” does not match, it is processed as no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, “gaming information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, and recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in “previous gaming machine information” and “previous gaming information”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. set. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “game table state”, “injustice detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

  The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. The “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether or not all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit1 to Bit7 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is a detection result of the fire strength sensor 19F. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275F, 276F, and 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 37) of the CU3F. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 44 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 45 transmits a command for requesting status information including a serial number = n and a card return ready status = OFF to the P table 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion executed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 46, each step of SF1 to SF7 is executed by CU3F. SF8-SF10 and SF12-SF15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of SF8 to SF10, SF12, SF13, and SF15 is executed by the effect control board 15F provided on the P stand 2F, and the transmission process of SF14 and SF15 is provided by the effect control unit 151F. The produced effect control board 15F transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined by SF2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the interrupted card. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 46, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control proceeds to SF4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game by SF6 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined at SF3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is not being inserted, the C-ID and type of the inserted card are stored and transmitted to the P base 2F by the SF 3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received and stored in the received C-ID, type and backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 40). The C-ID and type are compared (SF8). Then, it is determined by SF9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing is completed. .

  If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU 3F or P stand 2F, the SF 3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (SF8, SF9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (the effect control board 15F provided with the effect control unit 151F), it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control unit 171F side). A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it is possible to mass-produce small quantities of the communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of SF15 and SF7 as a control content of a modification. The game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU3F and then deleted by SF15. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801F. The host server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF9 that they match, the process proceeds to SF12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 40). The game history data is newly updated from the game history data.

  In addition, you may perform the process of F10, SF13, and SF14 as the control content of a modification. If YES in SF9, the control proceeds to SF10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted by SF13. Further, after SF12, SF14 sends a notification that the players are the same to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of SF10, SF13, SF14 and the processes of SF15, SF7.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 47, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 48, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 49 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 49, the number of possessed balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 49, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2F where the game ball remains and inserts a store card into one stand and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2F and the CU 3F communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Thus, with reference to FIG. 50, the automatic counting process of game balls at the time of closing a store will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3F is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2F recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3F. Then, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card insertion state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  When closing is set in the game hall where the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the state information, and the fact that a game ball remains in the P stand 2F indicates that the state information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 1, a card ID = 0, and a card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2F. That is, the P card 2F is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of the CU3F at the card insertion time = 0. As described above, since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3F, it becomes unnecessary for the store clerk to go around the P table 2F where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2F recognizes that the card has been inserted into the CU 3F, and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU opening state is OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2F.

  The store closing setting in the amusement hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323F distributes a closing command to the CU3F from the hall management computer or the hall server 801F installed in the amusement hall, for example. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801F, a closing command for closing the shop is distributed to each CU 3F. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801F, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3F at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323F may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU3F is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), a time (for example, 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed. When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3F transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2F.

  In response to this, in the P stand 2F, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A status information response including is transmitted to the CU3F. That is, since the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count the remaining game balls, the P ball 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count up, and the last transmission count of the previous time. Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3F which received it adds the number of count balls = 50 sent from P stand 2F to the number of balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3F backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3F returns to P stand 2F in order to notify receipt of a counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return preparation state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2F. The counting balls received from the P stand 2F are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3F as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P stand 2F that has received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. Then, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls, and there is no remaining gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 0) and notifies the state that the counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). = N + 3, Number of game balls = 0, Count sequence number = m + 1, Count ball number = 0 and Count request = OFF Sends a status information response to CU3F.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in the CU3F is performed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2F in order to notify the P unit 2F that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into the CU3F has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including the serial number = n + 4, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the CU3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU 3F.

  In this way, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28F, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of the CU3F. Note that the CU3F may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the upper server 801F together with the identification information of the P stand 2F or the CU3F. The host server 801F stores the number of balls sent from the CU 3F for each date, P stand 2F or CU 3F, so that the balls can be returned to the player at a later date. Further, the CU 3F may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the upper server 801F in association with the counted number of retained balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the store closing process when the card is not inserted and the game ball remains in the P stand 2F has been described. However, the store closing process when the card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same processing as the processing of “card return)” (see FIG. 51) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28F, or may automatically perform the counting process by the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 51, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with the speaker 270F. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting the state information including “waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 51 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information request has not arrived (a command has not reached the P base 2F from the CU 3F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 52, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, in order to notify the game machine information CU3F, the P machine 2F transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3F. . The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, the P table 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game table information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to the CU3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 52, CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not reached yet due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (the command has not reached the CU 3F from the P stand 2F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 53, after a power failure occurs during the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801F that regularly receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the CU3F is turned on and starts operating. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n−1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P unit 2F compares and determines the previous last transmission sequence number = n−1 of the received recovery request and the last final transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). . As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached the CU 3F. Therefore, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information exists) to the CU 3F, assuming that the game information has not been notified to the CU 3F. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU 3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU 3F executes a recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3F executes the first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, in the P stand 2F, unreported game stand information (game balls = 450, added balls = 6, subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach the CU 3F before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3F by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match and match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, another recovery process for the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another example of the process when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the status information response has not yet reached from the pachinko machine to the card unit. In particular, there is a power outage / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P stand 2F to CU3F) The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3F, or by manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by removing / inserting the CU3F from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 54, after a power failure occurs in the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU3F is replaced and a new CU3F starts operation.

  In addition, when CU3F which was operating before CU exchange has memorized the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801F (the number of balls).

  When the exchanged CU3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F. Is done. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3F has been exchanged, it does not have the last transmission serial number of the previous time. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P base 2F compares and determines the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the CU 3F after the exchange and the last final transmission serial number = n backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). To do. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F in order to perform the recovery process. Specifically, the P-base 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including game information storage presence to the CU 3F as having game information to perform recovery processing for the exchanged CU 3F. The recovery information notified to the CU3F by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous game table information, and the previous game table information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. Note that the CU3F performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, added balls total = + 3, subtracted balls total = + 23) using the previous game table information received from the P table 2F, and sets the previous last transmission serial number. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3F waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3F reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. The P unit 2F backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F, and the backed up data and the CU3F are transmitted. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that the card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F without waiting for the remote control operation. If they do not match, error processing such as invalidating the number of game balls in the P platform 2F is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process for the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the addition request has not yet reached (the command for addition request from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F has not reached) due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 55, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. The CU3F has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the backup CU3F compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of added balls when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 56, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, in the P stand 2F, without knowing that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped, a command for requesting the status information of the CU 3F is received, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. The P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3F, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs the addition recovery. Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The CU3F has a matching card ID and card insertion time, and depends on whether or not the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. In addition, an addition recovery process determination as to whether or not to perform an addition recovery process is performed. In the addition recovery process determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. Therefore, it is determined that the addition recovery process is not performed, and it is determined that the addition recovery process is performed otherwise.

  When the CU 3F basically determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, the CU 3F does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. However, although the CU 3F determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, if the recovery request 2 command is erroneously transmitted to the P unit 2F, the recovery process is performed. There is an inconvenience of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F after the determination of the addition recovery process determination, the P unit 2F includes the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery request 2 command. Then, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P base 2F matches, and it is determined again whether or not the addition recovery processing is performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F adds the previous final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of the CU3F and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2F. It is determined that the recovery process is not performed, and the information of the process NG is notified to the CU3F. Therefore, the P platform 2F transmits a recovery response 2 including a serial number = 2 and a processing result = processing NG to the CU 3F.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 57, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, the P base 2F receives the CU3F status information request command and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3F is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P stand 2F, the addition ball from the CU 3F cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2F, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs addition recovery. Request processing. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 including the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2F.

  In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = processing NG, the CU 3F clears the game ball addition request state and turns it off, and performs a third check described later. Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Further, since the CU3F is in the OFF state after the game ball addition request state is cleared, state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P stand 2F again of the addition request. The request is transmitted to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the current number of game balls = 50 without adding if the number of balls to be added = 125 of the recovery request 2 cannot be added to the number of game balls = 50 due to an abnormal addition state. To do. Specifically, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. The addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the status information request because the game ball addition result is NG. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F performs a process of canceling the determined consumption of the stored balls based on the information of the current number of game balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3F to P stand 2F has not arrived) and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 58, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F is replaced and the new P base 2F starts operating. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained. Note that the CU 3F performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2F is replaced.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2F is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F being backed up, the CU3F has not received a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 59, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F stops operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1, a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m + 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Therefore, it can be determined that the state information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication interruption has reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of balls when the count request is not reached due to power interruption / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication line disconnection and a count request command from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting request is not reached (the counting request command from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 60, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU3F receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. In other words, the CU 3F has not yet reached the counting request from the P platform 2F. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Since there is no (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 61, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3F. . The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F executes a process of adding the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, a command for requesting status information including a count sequence number = m and a count response = OFF (because of an abnormal count state) is transmitted from the CU 3F. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F has stopped operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P table 2F is the last recovery count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (“m” is not updated due to a count error) and inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Since the last transmission count sequence number that was backed up last time = m + 1 does not match (disagreement), the state information response that was last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. I can judge. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the last transmission count sequence number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2F cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is an abnormality in the game ball addition result at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 62, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, the CU3F confirms the consumption of the holding balls / storing balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3F backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2F. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3F status information request command, the P stand 2F sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3F that received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to the base 2F. The CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2F remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  Further, the CU3F that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted for the second time to P platform 2F. Note that the CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted while the addition sequence number remains m + 1.

  The P stand 2F still remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  CU3F is a process of adding a game ball in the P stand 2F when receiving a response of a response of a state information response including a game ball addition result = NG even if the state information request command is retransmitted twice. As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2F, the CU 3F retransmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + X, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. . In P 2F, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the addition of game balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After the addition process to the game balls is performed, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3F. In response to this, the CU 3F turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 63 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operation of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 63 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received electronic message as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2F that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a storage ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3F has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P base 2F receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed, for example, by the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P stand 2F side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU3F includes an area for backup storage of the added serial number included in the immediately previous transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the message (6) compares the addition sequence number stored in the backup with the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'in FIG. 63 shows a case where the request message has not reached the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2F waits for a telegram arrival from the CU 3F, no telegram is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ', and retransmits the same request message (5) "because there is no response from the P-unit 2F.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F relating to the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 64 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, the request message of (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F (normal sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2F does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2F receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is performed, for example, by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F determines whether or not a counting process (addition process for holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P base 2F has an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'in FIG. 64 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2F. The P base 2F that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2F retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  In contrast, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3F regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3F and the P unit 2F). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323F will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 (a), 65 (b), and 66. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the game table information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P table 2F. In the case of FIGS. 53 and 54 described above, the game table information (specifically, Since the previous game table information) is included, the SF 300 makes a determination of YES. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that game table information is stored, control proceeds to SF 301, and the number of additional balls included in the received game table information (specifically, previous game table information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the status information request and the status information response between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than (Equation 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, when the number of additional balls is larger than the threshold value N1, game table information including the number of additional balls and the number of game balls that have been illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P unit 2F while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to the CU3F. In that case, the control proceeds to SF 304 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801F. (In this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF305, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing of SF301 and SF303, the information stored on the CU3F side is that the cause is that the CU3F or the P stand 2F is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P platform 2F during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF301, the control proceeds to SF302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323F and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2F is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added number of balls and the number of subtracted balls. It is calculated. Next, in SF303, the calculated R1-absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2F returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. The SF 310 determines whether or not the threshold value N3 is greater than or equal to the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is the time from when the P unit last transmits a status information response to the CU3F until the P unit loses power or until the P unit detects a communication line disconnection and the game stops. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. When the received number of added balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to SF314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312F, and an error occurs in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF315, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF310, the control proceeds to SF311 and the received number of added balls is added to the number of game balls stored in CU control unit 323F and the received number of subtracted balls is subtracted. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. Note that the “number of game balls stored” here is the number of game balls received from the P stand 2F when NO is determined in SF303, as described above. Then, SF 312 determines whether or not the difference between R2 and the number of game balls received from P stand 2F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a risk of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in SF 312, the control proceeds to SF 313, and the CU control unit 323 F stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 F as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of SF 313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F uses the SF 313 to set initial values. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2F based on the current number of game balls It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of game balls coming exceeds a predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5). If it exceeds, an abnormality is determined, and the above-described SF 304, SF 305, SF 314, SF 315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323F executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P platform 2F (see FIGS. 55, 57, and 58).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P unit 2F complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3F outputs a request for adding the number of game balls to the P unit 2F. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 is sent from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F to notify the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. The CU control unit 323F uses the SF 320 to determine whether the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, control proceeds to SF324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error has occurred in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to that effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control proceeds to SF325, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control proceeds to SF321, and the CU control unit 323F performs a process of adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2F to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU3F has been normally performed in the P unit 2F, and the added number of balls is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to SF322, and an operation of calculating R3 by adding the added ball number transmitted from the P unit 2F to the added game ball number and subtracting the subtracted ball number is performed. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, previous game table information) transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response, and the previous game table information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, SF 323 determines whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and the control proceeds to SF324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323F.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted as gaming machine information first from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time, so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3F side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323F can determine the suitability of each of the game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2F should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored at the present time by the CU control unit 323F. The game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter, for example, should not be very different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU3F. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323F can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2F to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2F. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU3F, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3F stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P unit 2F (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2F (hereinafter referred to as the “P game latest game ball number”) is compared and determined by the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged after the communication is cut off, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323F is 2 or more, the CU 3F or the P unit 2F The CU control unit 323F determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323F does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged, control may be performed so that the previous game stand data and the current play stand data are not checked at the CU 3F side at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent annoyance in which a check abnormality determination due to replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number update method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 42 to 64 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number update method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 67 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F relating to the request sequence number. One of the A device and the B device shown in FIG. 67 is a P stand 2F, and the other is a CU3F. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When A device is CU3F and B device is P stand 2F, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P stand 2F and the B device is the CU3F, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3F side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2F side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  FIG. 67 (3) 'shows a case where the request message in (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the operations of the P base 2F and the CU 3F regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification is different from the example shown in FIG. 67 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 68, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF. First, encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  For both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325bF receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325aF. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325bF from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325bF. The communication control IC 325aF is also similar to the SC 325bF. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and the authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325bF Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325aF during the initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for anti-game machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325bF using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325bF obtains an effective key via the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325bF transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325aF, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325bF performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323F using the acquired board initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323F in a timely manner using the board initial key. Further, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code stored as the initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 75). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F acquires the first predetermined data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325bF performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information as in the SC325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU3F shown in FIG. 40 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF of the security board 325F will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF will be described.

  70 and 71 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board connection request command requests the SC 325bF to connect to a gaming machine (P unit 2F). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the board connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board shipping key request command is for requesting the board shipping key from the SC 325bF. A board shipment key response response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 is for requesting the board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board maker code authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is a request for the board serial ID authentication to the SC 325bF. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the board 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  A command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The board shipment key authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  The board shipment key authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the version information response notifies the CU control unit 323F that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325bF. A response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This communication key request command requests the SC325bF for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests gaming machine chip inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of gaming machine chip inquiry information.

  A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the game result of gaming machine chip information to SC325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the gaming machine chip verification result has been received.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board status request command requests the board status to the SC 325bF. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325bF will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 72, a process for starting up the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on and the hall is installed will be described. FIG. 72 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall and the power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A from the host device (specifically, from the hall server), the MAC key of the board initial key A, valid Acquire a key (for commercial / P shipment). Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method conforming to the AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the power-on / normal startup processing of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 73 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to the AES encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 74 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU 3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F has not been able to obtain the basic initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. 72 is the hall installation startup sequence described in FIG. 72 after the CU3F that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall, and is executed after the board authentication key is acquired. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG for n times continuously, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared (see FIG. 88). After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM While clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 72), which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, processing of the authentication sequence of the board initial key or board shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 76, in the state of the substrate initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the basic initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the base shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 76 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F transmits a board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 78, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host apparatus. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. After that, the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine chip information, so the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK is CU controlled. Reply to part 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 69). Queries gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the processing of the sequence of the board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of the board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, and the gaming machine chip information inquiry are performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 800F of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining processing of a security board information inquiry timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F again. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and inquiry information. Query information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry (collation) timeout sequence for gaming machine chip information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry results (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 82 will be described below.

  As a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall, there is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 72). This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 72). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 72) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 76, that is, even at a stage where the board has not yet been carried into the game arcade. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipment key request and the board shipment key response shown in FIG. 76 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Main sequence in communication between communication control IC and security chip>
Next, FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining processing of a business message sequence between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. Referring to FIG. 83, the processing of SC 325bF and communication control IC 325aF after the CU 3F is turned on will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the SC325bF and the communication control IC 325aF are activated. When activated, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the CU control unit 323F, and when activated, the communication control IC 325aF performs authentication with the gaming machine.

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF perform the communication control IC authentication sequence using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. In the case of the “temporary authentication key mode” described with reference to FIG. 69, the temporary authentication key is used, and in the case of the main authentication key mode after the main authentication key is generated, the main authentication key is used.

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF perform the security information update sequence by using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Further, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF perform the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF transmits a communication key request command for requesting a communication key to the communication control IC 325aF. The communication key request command is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the communication key request command, the communication control IC 325aF generates a communication key (session key) for communicating the business message with the gaming machine, and notifies the generated communication key to the SC 325bF as a response to the communication key response. Note that the response of the communication key response to be returned is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Specifically, the communication key (session key) is generated using a random number and current time data. The current time data may be generated by the communication control IC 325aF itself or received from another device. The method for generating the communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the current time data, and any data may be used as long as it is variable data other than the key used for the above-described mutual authentication.

After the above process is completed, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.
FIG. 84 is a flow for explaining specific control of “authentication by the board authentication key”. Referring to FIG. 84, a series of processing described below is performed between CU control unit 323F and SC325bF.

  In step SF201, an authentication process (unit authentication) using a board serial ID is performed using a challenge response method (see board serial ID authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 77).

  When the single authentication in step SF201 is completed, the key version is checked in the next step SF202 (see version information notification / response in FIG. 77).

  When the check of the key version in step SF202 is completed, device authentication using the board authentication key is performed in the next step SF203 (see board authentication key authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 77).

  When the device authentication process in step SF203 is completed, the authentication results in steps SF201 to SF203 are mutually notified in the next step SF204, and the process proceeds to the next step SF205 (board authentication result notification / response in FIG. 77). reference).

  In step SF205, it is determined whether or not the notified authentication result is normal. If the authentication result is normal, the process proceeds to step SF206. If the authentication result is not normal, the process proceeds to step SF207.

  In step SF206, it is further determined whether or not the CU control unit 323F has the security board information acquired from the SC 325bF. If the CU control unit 323F has the security board information to be acquired, the process proceeds to step SF209 to acquire the security board information. If there is no security board information to be processed, the process proceeds to step SF210.

  In step SF209, the board authentication key authentication process between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF further shifts to a security board information inquiry process, and the process ends. On the other hand, in step SF210, the authentication in the board authentication key mode ends normally, and the process ends. In this case, game machine chip information verification processing is performed between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF.

  On the other hand, if the authentication result is not normal in step SF205, the process proceeds to step SF206. In step SF206, it is determined whether or not the number of retries is the third time. If the number of retries is the third time, the process proceeds to step SF208, and the number of retries is not the third time (the first or second number of retries). If so, the process returns to step SF201, and the authentication process is performed again.

  In step SF208, a SC325bF board authentication abnormality is set to a standby state until a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on). After the reset operation, it is activated again in a mode (substrate initial key mode) in which authentication processing is performed again using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, each authentication processing is performed, and the processing ends. In this case, the business of that day is operated in this board initial key mode throughout the day, and when the power is turned on the next day, a security board information acquisition request is issued again to the key management server to try to acquire the security board information (see FIG. 81). Further, as shown in step SF208a, the inquiry process for the security board information may be executed again at this time without waiting for the power-up of the next day. In this case, while the game is progressing by the operation in the board initial key mode, the inquiry process of the security board information is also advanced in parallel.

  FIG. 85 (a) is an example of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC. Referring to FIG. 85A, in step SF211, the CU control unit 323F requests the key authentication server for a board authentication key, and the process proceeds to the next step SF212.

  In step SF212, the CU control unit 323F acquires the board authentication key from the security board information sent from the key management server, and transmits the update information in the security board information to the SC 325bF, and the next step SF213. The process proceeds.

  In step SF213, the CU control unit 323F determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. When the mode switching process of the next step SF214 is performed, it becomes impossible to communicate the number of add / subtract balls with the gaming machine that is executing the switching process, so that the gaming machine is not in operation before the mode switching process of step SF214 is performed. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state is determined based on whether or not a player's card is inserted in the CU. When no card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an inoperative state, while when a card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an operating state. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is in a non-operating state, the process proceeds to step SF214. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is not in a non-operating state, the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. Step SF213 is processed until.

  In step SF214, based on the board authentication key acquired in step SF212, the CU control unit 323F advances the process using the board authentication key as the encryption key from the mode in which the board initial key is used as the encryption key (board initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode), and the process ends.

  FIG. 85B is an example of a flowchart for explaining a communication mode switching process between the SC and the communication control IC. Referring to FIG. 85 (b), in step SF216, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF in step SF212. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF217, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, similarly to step SF213 described above, in step SF218, the SC 325bF determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, and executes the process of step SF219 on the condition that it is in a non-operating state. In step SF219, the SC 325bF uses the authentication key as the encryption key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the process proceeds with the temporary authentication key as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF based on the generated authentication key. Switch to the mode to proceed with the process (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, before the authenticity of the CU is authenticated by the board authentication key registered in the key management server, a normal communication mode is entered and the game on the P cards using the remaining card amount is performed. It can be prevented from becoming possible. Furthermore, even when the board authentication key registered in the key management server cannot be received, the restricted communication mode is set and a game on the P units is allowed, so that flexible operation is possible. In addition, in this case, since the game is allowed under a predetermined restriction compared to the normal communication mode, the operation can be performed without requiring authentication with the board authentication key stored in the key management server. It can be prevented from continuing.

  86 (a) and 86 (b) are other examples of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process. Referring to FIG. 86 (a) showing the processing for switching the communication mode between the CU control unit and the SC, in step SF221, the CU control unit 323F requests security board information from the key management server, and the next step SF222 is performed. The process proceeds.

  In step SF222, the hall server obtains the security board information requested by the CU control unit 323F from the key management server from the key management server, and the hall server obtains the board authentication key from the security board information. Next, in step SF223, the hall server determines whether or not the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F that requested the security board information is in a non-operating state for the same purpose as in step SF213 described above. When the gaming machine becomes non-operating, the hall server transmits the acquired board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F in step SF224, and the CU control unit 323F receives the update information in the security board information in SC325bF. Send to. Next, in step SF225, the CU control unit 323F processes the substrate authentication key as an encryption key from the mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key (substrate initial key mode) based on the substrate authentication key acquired in step SF224. The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode) to advance the process, and the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 86 (b) showing a process for switching the communication mode between the SC and the communication control IC, in step SF226, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF at step SF224. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF227, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, in step SF228, the SC 325bF obtains the authentication key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the temporary authentication key is used as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF based on the generated real authentication key. Switch to a mode in which processing is performed as an encryption key (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, even when the hall server receives the board authentication key from the key management server in the restricted communication mode, the board authentication key is immediately transmitted to the CU when the P units are in operation. Provided in the restricted communication mode because the board authentication key is sent from the hall server to the CU and switched to the normal communication mode on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, instead of switching to the normal communication mode. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages by affecting the game that has been played.

<Authentication operation between SC325bF and CU control unit 323F>
Next, the unified store code check and the board manufacturer code authentication will be described in more detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 87, the unified store code check process by SC325bF will be described. This process is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF checks the unified store code notified at the time of board connection request and the unified store code notified last time, and determines that the installed store has changed if there is a mismatch. SC325bF determines whether or not the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101). For example, all data of the dummy code of the unified store code is “0xFF”. This dummy code is used in place of the normal unified store code at the time of shipment before the CU3F is installed in the game hall (store), and is already stored in the SC 325bF at the time of shipment. Then, at the time of shipment, the dummy code is input to the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F, and the SC 325bF authenticates the input dummy code and the stored dummy code by matching. The dummy code is stored as a default in the hall server of the amusement hall as a temporary shop code when a unified store code has not yet been acquired for a newly opened game hall (hall). Then, the dummy code is downloaded from the hall server to the CU3F installed in the game hall of the newly opened store, and the SC325bF determines that the downloaded dummy code and the stored dummy code match and authenticates, and the P unit 2F Allows gaming.

  The hall server that has acquired the regular unified store code transmits the unified store code to the CU control unit 323F. Upon receiving the request, the CU control unit 323F transmits the unified store code to the SC 325bF at the next board connection request when the power is turned on. Receiving it, SC325bF, when determining that the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101: YES), updates the storage to the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request. However, it does not initialize the board authentication key and the main authentication key information and operates by taking over the previous authentication modes. Thereafter, the SC 325bF stores the authentication log information (step SF1106). The initialization of the board authentication key and the main authentication key information is a process that is required when a CU3F installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall, but a dummy code stored in the SC325bF. Is updated to the unified store code when the amusement hall of the newly-opened store obtains the unified store code and downloads the unified store code to the CU3F. It is not necessary to initialize the key and the authentication key information. Conversely, if the board authentication key and this authentication key information are initialized in such a case, a request for obtaining the board authentication key is required again, increasing the number of board initial key operations (timed operation) in one business day, and timed operation. There is a disadvantage that the grace period is reduced. In order to avoid such inconvenience, control is performed so that the board authentication key and the main authentication key information are not initialized.

  On the other hand, if the SC325bF determines that the previous unified store code stored is not a dummy code (step SF1101: NO), the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request and the stored previous store code are stored. It is determined whether or not the unified store code matches (step SF1102).

  When the SC325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request matches the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: YES), the authentication process is performed on the board initial key. Transition to an authentication sequence, or transition to a board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1103). Note that the SC 325bF transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is the board authentication key mode, and shifts to the board initial key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is any other authentication mode.

  On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request does not match the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: NO), the board authentication key information , And this authentication key information is initialized (cleared) (step SF1104). Such a mismatch in the unified store code occurs when a CU3F that has been installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall. Since the CU3F has been moved to another amusement hall, the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information used in the previous amusement hall are initialized (cleared) to ensure security. When the unified store code notified from the CU control unit 323F is changed, the SC 325bF sets the authentication key initialization (clear) in the communication control IC 325aF and starts authentication using the temporary authentication key. Note that when the SC325bF initializes (clears) the authentication key information, the communication control IC 325aF may also control to initialize (clear) the authentication key information, and particularly performs such control. The authentication may be returned to the temporary authentication key because the SC 325bF is not the main authentication key at the next authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Further, the SC 325bF initializes (clears) the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information in step SF1104, and then transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence and the temporary authentication key sequence (step SF1105).

  In step SF1103, the SC 325bF transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, or transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence, and in step SF1104, transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, and then stores the authentication log information. (Step SF1106).

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart for explaining the board manufacturer code authentication operation. The board maker code authentication is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF and the CU control unit 323F perform authentication using the board maker code stored as initial information. Referring to FIG. 88, first, SC 325bF and CU control unit 323F perform unit authentication by a challenge / response method using the stored board manufacturer code. (Step SF1201). The response code generated at the time of single unit authentication is generated, for example, by performing block encryption of the challenge code using the stored board manufacturer code as a key and then hashing with a hash function.

  The SC 325bF determines whether the authentication result obtained by checking the response code generated by the CU control unit 323F with respect to the generated challenge code is normal (step SF1202). If the SC 325bF determines that the authentication result is normal (step SF1202: YES), the SC 325bF determines whether it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203). On the other hand, when determining that the authentication result is not normal (abnormal) (step SF1202: NO), the SC 325bF determines whether or not the authentication result is abnormal n times (for example, three times) continuously (step SF1204).

  If the SC 325bF determines that it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: YES), the process proceeds to the board authentication key authentication process and maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1205). On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that it has not been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: NO), the process proceeds to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1206).

  SC325bF returns a process to step SF1201, when it is judged that it is not abnormal continuously n times (step SF1204: NO). On the other hand, when the SC 325bF determines that the abnormality is continuous n times (step SF1204: YES), the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are initialized (cleared) in order to ensure security (step SF1207). . Thereby, the inconvenience that the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are stolen can be prevented. Thereafter, the SC 325bF makes a transition to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1208).

  The SC 325bF maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence in step SF1205, or transitions to the board initial key authentication process in steps SF1206 and SF1208, and then stores the authentication log information (step SF1209).

<Health Check>
Next, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, for example, even when communication between the CU3F or P stand 2F and the key management server is interrupted, the CU 3F or P stand 2F is stably operated. It is possible to continue operation using the timed operation function. However, there is a possibility that illegal operation is performed by operating the CU 3F or the P stand 2F without intentionally using the timed operation function and communicating with the key management server. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F operating using the timed operation function continues to be disconnected from the key management server for a predetermined period, the timed operation function Is configured to be disabled. In the present embodiment, even if the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is disabled, the setting of the timed operation function is enabled again when communication with the key management server is recovered and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing processing for invalidating the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 89, processing for invalidating the timed operation function will be described. The processing for invalidating the timed operation function is performed in a predetermined manner between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F, between the hall server 801F and the CU control unit 323F, and between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  First, the CU 3F including the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF communicates with the P stand 2F, so that a player can play a game on the P stand 2F. At this time, for example, in communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, encryption communication based on the secret key A is performed, and a status information request command from the CU control unit 323F is also a response of a status information response from the SC 325bF. Is also encrypted based on the secret key A.

  The secret key A is periodically updated by a health check from the key management server 800F, so that communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can be normally performed. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 89 transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF to perform a health check during normal communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. However, since the communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is disconnected, the health check request command does not reach the CU control unit 323F.

  The health check from the key management server 800F is performed once a day, for example, and the health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because the communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is disconnected. The health check request is sent on the next day without re-sending.

  The communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF continues communication without any limitation because of the timed operation function even when the health check from the key management server 800F is not performed and the secret key A is not updated. Can be done. For this reason, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be performed normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be normally operated to enable the business on the P stand 2F.

  However, even if the key management server 800F transmits a health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323F, for example, if the state continues for 10 days (10 times if health check is performed once a day), It is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded. If it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, the SC 325bF disables the timed operation function and cannot perform communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the secret key A. When the secret key A cannot be used in the communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF, the communication content is greatly limited, and the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is also limited. Therefore, the operation of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be disabled, or can be operated with significant restrictions.

  In the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, encryption communication based on the secret key A is not performed, and the status information request command from the CU control unit 323F and the response of the status information response from the SC 325bF are also the secret key. Not encrypted based on A. Instead, for example, communication may be performed with encryption based on the initial key A held in the CU control unit 323F or SC325bF. In this case, for example, commands that can be communicated between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF are greatly limited.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalidated when the state in which communication with the key management server is interrupted cannot be continuously checked for a predetermined period of time, so the timed operation function is used. Thus, it is possible to prevent the P stand 2F from operating illegally. The invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function is that there is a period during which the health check cannot be performed for 10 days. However, the health check request command is not received and the response of the health check response cannot be received. It may be a condition that the predetermined number of times has been reached.

  Next, processing for enabling the timed operation function for a gaming system in which the timed operation function is disabled will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining processing for enabling the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 90, processing for enabling the timed operation function will be described. The process for enabling the timed operation function is performed in a predetermined process between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F, between the hall server 801F and the CU control unit 323F, and between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  First, the CU 3F including the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF communicates with the P-unit 2F, transmits a status information request command from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and receives a response of the status information response from the SC 325bF to the CU. It is transmitted to the control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF operate in a timed manner when an invalid condition is established in a state in which a health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is not possible. The function is disabled.

  Thereafter, when the line between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is restored and communication is possible, a health check response to the health check request transmitted from the key management server 800F is obtained. The state in which the health check from the key management server 800F can be performed has passed for three days, and the key management server 800F makes a health check request on the fourth day. If the health check is enabled, encrypted communication based on the secret key A is performed in communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF.

  Specifically, the key management server 800F transmits a health check request command to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F receiving the command transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323F. Further, the CU control unit 323F receives a command from the hall server 801F and transmits a board state request command including a health check request as additional information to the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board status request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF enables the timed operation function that has been disabled because the line is restored and the health check has been normally performed for three days. By enabling the timed operation function, even if communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is interrupted in the future and the health check cannot be performed, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are concealed using the timed operation function. Communication based on the key A can be performed. As a result, the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be stably operated even if a failure such as a disconnection of communication with the key management server 800F occurs.

  Further, the SC 325bF receives the substrate state request command and transmits a substrate state response response including a health check response as additional information to the CU control unit 323F. The health check response includes the state information of SC 325bF and the state information of P base 2F received from P base 2F. Although not shown in FIG. 71, the SC 325bF makes a health check request to the P base 2F and receives a health check response from the P base 2F, thereby acquiring the status information of the P base 2F.

  The CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response from the SC 325bF, and transmits the response of the health check response to the hall server 801F. The response of the health check response includes, for example, information on the authentication state between the CU control unit 323F and SC325bF. Further, the hall server 801F receives the response of the health check response from the CU control unit 323F, and transmits the response of the health check response to the key management server 800F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalid when the health check can be performed continuously for a predetermined period when the line with the key management server is restored and communication is possible. Since it is enabled, it is possible to operate stably without impeding the operation of the amusement hall using the timed operation function. In addition, since it is not necessary for the clerk to operate each CU 3F or P stand 2F in order to validate the timed operation function that is invalid, the work of the clerk can be reduced. Note that the return condition for enabling the timed operation function is that the health check can be performed for 3 days. However, the return condition is not limited to this, and a health check request command is sent to respond to the health check response. It is also possible to make it a condition that the number of times that can be received has reached a predetermined number. Also, the period during which health check is disabled (for example, 10 days), which is an invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function, is compared to the period during which health check is enabled (for example, 3 days), which is a return condition for enabling the timed operation function. This makes it possible to operate the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stably without impeding the operation of the game hall while preventing unauthorized use of the timed operation function.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 40, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between main control unit 161F, payout control unit 171F, and communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F shown in FIG. 91 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but the same function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 92 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 93 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and cryptographic communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 94 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 94, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 95 is a flowchart for explaining recovery completion confirmation processing.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 96 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, a sequence that is processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. The sequence shown in FIG. 97 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. In FIG. 98, in particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 98, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main control portion 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout control portion 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Configuration of open detection and connection detection>
Next, a configuration for detecting the opening and connection of the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described. The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment has a configuration for performing detection of opening of the glass door 6F, detection of opening of the front frame 5F, and detection of connection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. FIG. 99 is a block diagram for explaining opening detection and connection detection of the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment. The front frame 5F and the game board 26F shown in FIG. 99 (a) are electrically connected by a concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side and a convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side. . The front frame 5F includes an open detection part 53F, a front frame relay board 52F, a payout control board 17F, and a concave drawer connector 33F connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500F. That is, the power line 500F is wired to the open detection unit 53F, the front frame relay board 52F, the payout control board 17F, and the concave drawer connector 33F provided in the front frame 5F, and the respective connections are disconnected (for example, disconnection or When the connector is disconnected, etc., no current flows through the power line 500F. The game board 26F has a convex drawer connector 32F and a main control board 16F. By connecting the convex drawer connector 32F to the concave drawer connector 33F, the main control board 16F is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F. That is, the power line 500F is also wired to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F and the main control board 16F, and when the connection is disconnected (for example, disconnection or disconnection of the connector), the power line 500F No current flows in the. The convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F correspond to board connection detection means that can detect electrical connection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by disconnecting.

  Power line 500F is included in the wiring in a signal cable (for example, signal cable 36F shown in FIG. 39) that transmits and receives signals between front frame 5F and game board 26F. The signal cable of the front frame 5F and the signal cable of the game board 26F are connected by a 26-pin or 32-pin convex drawer connector 32F and a concave drawer connector 33F. In FIG. 99A, the signal cable is not shown, and only the loop-shaped power line 500F is shown.

  FIG. 99B is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the opening detection unit 53F. The open detection unit 53F includes an open detection switch 12aF, a current detector 12bF, and a count counter 120F. The opening detection switch 12aF is a glass door opening detection switch 12F that detects opening of the glass door 6F and a front frame opening detection switch 13F that detects opening of the front frame 5F. When the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened ( OFF state) The loop-shaped power line 500F is connected in series so as to be disconnected. In FIG. 99 (b), for the sake of simplicity, one open detection switch 12aF is shown. However, in an actual configuration, the glass door open detection switch 12F and the front frame open detection switch 13F An open detection switch 12aF is provided corresponding to each.

  The current detector 12bF is connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F, and detects a current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500F. When the current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500F is no longer detected, the current detector 12bF detects that the open detection switch 12aF is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected. can do. The current detector 12bF outputs a detection signal to the count counter 120F when detecting that the open detection switch 12aF is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected. The current detector 12bF is backed up so that the main power is supplied from the power supply circuit of the P base 2F and can operate even when the main power is turned off (for example, at night). Power from the power supply is being supplied.

  The counting counter 120F indicates the number of times the glass door 6F is opened, the number of times the front frame 5F is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected based on the detection signal from the current detector 12bF. Count. FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of count counter 120F shown in FIG. 99 (b). Referring to FIG. 100, a counting counter 120F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 10aF as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 10bF storing operation programs and control data of the CPU 10aF, and a work of the CPU 10aF. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 10cF that functions as an area and an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 10dF are provided.

  The count counter 120F is supplied with the power of the main power supply from the power supply circuit of the P base 2F, and the power of the backup power supply so that it can operate even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Is supplied. A clock signal (CLK signal) and a chip select signal (CS signal) are input from the payout control board 17F shown in FIG. 40, and a data signal indicating the value of the number of detections counted by the count counter 120F is a payout control unit. It is output to 171F.

  The counter 120F counts the total number of times the glass door 6F has been opened, the number of times the front frame 5F has been opened, and the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F, and indicates the number of detection times. Output data signal. The counting counter 120F can individually detect and count the number of times the glass door 6F is opened, the number of times the front frame 5F is opened, and the number of times the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected. You may comprise. Further, the number of times the main control board 16F is removed from the game board 26F by the connecting portion between the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500aF of the main control board 16F functioning as the main control connection detection means is also counted by the counter 120F. Can be detected. The connecting portion between the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500aF of the main control board 16F may be connected by a connector such as a drawer connector, or may be directly soldered and connected. Here, the power line 500aF of the main control board 16F is configured as a part of the loop-shaped power line 500F.

  Next, based on FIG. 101, the detection of the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F and the disconnection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F will be described. In the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 101 (a), the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened, and the opening detection unit 53F and the front frame relay board 52F are electrically disconnected. When the opening detector 53F and the front frame relay board 52F are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500F, and the current detector 12bF may detect the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F. it can.

  Further, in the P base 2F shown in FIG. 101 (b), the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are electrically disconnected. The situation is shown. When the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500F (that is, no current flows when the wiring constituting the power line 500F is disconnected). The current detector 12bF can detect disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. As shown in FIG. 101, the open detection switch 12aF of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F and the panel connection detection means of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500F. Yes. Therefore, the opening detection unit 53F can detect not only the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F but also the disconnection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  Next, a storage state of data stored in the RAM 10cF and a state in which a data signal is output according to the input of the CS signal and the CLK signal will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the RAM 10cF, a storage area for storing data of 1 to 18 bits of 18 bits is prepared. In the image in the RAM 10cF in FIG. 102, the bit storage areas 1 and 2 are areas for storing whether the CU3F is disconnected or in a normal state where it is not disconnected. At the time of disconnection, a value other than 01 is stored.

  In the image of the RAM 10cF, the bit data storage areas 3 to 8 indicate the number of times the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened at the start of power OFF of the P base 2F, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. This is a storage value area for storing the number of times of disconnection (disconnection) (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of detections). This stored value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110, and becomes 111111 at the time of overflow exceeding this range.

  Bit data storage areas 9 to 14 in the image in the RAM 10cF are current value storage areas (current value tables) for storing the current values of the number of detections. This current value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110. The storage of the current value storage area (current value table) is not initialized by an external operation. However, as will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (c), in the normal time when the power supply of the P stand 2F is ON, when the current value reaches the upper limit, it is counted up from the initial value again and loops.

  The bit data storage areas 15 and 16 in the image of the RAM 10cF take a value of 01 at a normal time that is not a power interruption, and take a value of 10 at a power interruption. The bit data storage areas 17 and 18 in the image of the RAM 10cF take a value of 01 after transmitting the number of detections to the payout control unit 171F, and take a value of 10 before sending.

  As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 103 (b), the current value storage area (current value table) is configured such that the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened when the power is cut off (when the power is turned off). Each time the mold drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected (hereinafter also simply referred to as opening the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F), the memory stored in the storage areas 3 to 8 The value is represented as n. Each time the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened, the count is incremented to n + 1, n + 2,... And the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is further opened after being counted up to the upper limit n + 61. The value is 63 (the value at which the round flag is set), and no further count-up is performed.

  Then, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned on, it is output to the payout control unit 171F as 12-bit data of 1 to 12, as shown in FIG. This data output indicates a normal time when the bit data of FIGS. 1 and 2 is 01, and a disconnection from the CU3F when the bit data is not 01. For the bit data of 3 to 8, the difference value (value in the range of 000000 to 111110) is output as a difference value obtained by subtracting the current value from the stored value at times other than the above-described overflow time. On the other hand, at the time of overflow, a value of 111111 is output.

  In addition, after the current value storage area (current value table) is counted up to the upper limit n + 61, the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is further opened, and the value becomes 63 (a value for raising the one-round flag). The count up may be continued even after. In that case, instead of outputting the final count value when outputting to the payout control unit 171F, the above-described overflow value “111111” is output.

  The bit data of 9 and 10 has a value of 01 at normal time and 10 at power interruption. Since the output of bit data 9 and 10 is 10, for example, it can be seen that the counter 120F is replaced at night. That is, when the counters 120F are exchanged, both the main power source and the backup power source are not supplied to the counters 120F. In this case, the bit data of 9 and 10 becomes 10, and the 10 As a result, the payout control unit 171F can determine that the count counter 120F has been illegally replaced at night.

  The bit data of 11 and 12 is 01 after the data is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F, and is 10 before the data is transmitted.

  Next, the relationship between the data signal output to the payout control unit 171F and the CLK signal and CS signal input from the payout control board 17F will be described. The RAM 10cF of the counting counter 120F stores the current value of the number of detections from when the game hall is closed and the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned off to when the power is turned on at the start of business the next morning. And after the power supply of P stand 2F is started, the payout control part 171F transmits CS signal and CLK signal to the count counter 120F in order to acquire the detection frequency.

  The CPU 10aF of the counting counter 120F that has received the CS signal and the CLK signal repeatedly loops data until the CS signal falls according to the rising edge of the CS signal, and outputs the data to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F determines that an appropriate data signal has been received when the data signal transmitted repeatedly is read, for example, three times and the same data is read three times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102, when there is no CLK signal for 100 .mu. During the CS signal rising period (when it is low level), the data is set to 1 at the next rising edge of the CLK signal. Control to discharge from the bit is performed.

  This 100μ is configured so that the gaming machine manufacturer can input and set it in the register of the counting counter 120F. In addition, you may comprise so that it can input and set to a register | resistor in the game hall side.

  In addition, when the round flag is set after the CS signal and the CLK signal have performed a predetermined operation, control is performed to clear the stored value of the RAM 10cF of the count counter 120F and set the value to 000000. For example, the stored value of the CPU (register) 10aF is cleared at a stage where the CLK signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times after the CS signal becomes low level.

  Note that a backable RAM is used as a memory to detect that the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened and store the count value even when the power of the P base 2F is OFF. If 2F is always powered on, a register may be used instead of RAM.

  Next, based on FIG. 103, the control operation of the CPU 10aF of the count counter 120F will be described. First, referring to FIG. 103 (a), in step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 501, it is determined whether or not the main power supply of the P base 2F is OFF and the backup power supply is ON. Since the main power supply is on during normal business hours at the amusement hall, the determination is NO by SF501, the control proceeds to SF507, and the detection signal rises when the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened. Each time it is opened, a process of counting up the number of times of opening is performed, and the connection is triggered by the rise of the detection signal associated with the disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. Every time it is removed, the number of times is counted up. This count-up is counted up in the current value storage area (current value table) described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (c) shows how the current value table counts up normally when the power is turned on. In the current value table, the count value is counted so as to loop, such as counting up from 0, counting up to 62 which is the upper limit thereof, and counting up from 0 again. Then, the value of the current value table counted up by the SF 507 is displayed on the 7-segment display 50F.

  On the other hand, during the period from when the amusement hall is closed and the P main power is turned off until the main power is turned on at the start of business the next morning, the determination of YES is made by SF 501 and the control is performed in SF 502. Proceed to In SF502, control is performed to store the value (current value) in the current value storage area (current value table) shown in FIG. 102 as a stored value in an area (3 to 8 in FIG. 102). Next, SF 503 controls to count up the current value in the current value table every time it is opened or disconnected every time the detection signal rises until it returns to the stored value in the current value table. . FIG. 103 (b) shows how the current value table counts up during monitoring when the main power supply is OFF. The stored value is set to n, counts up from n, counts up to the upper limit thereof, n + 61, and stores 63 as a value in which the one-round flag is set if the detection signal further rises in this state. When the stored value reaches the value at which this round flag is set, the stored value is held at the value of “63” without performing any counting operation even if the detection signal subsequently rises.

  Next, control proceeds to SF504, where it is determined whether or not the main power source is ON and the backup power source is OFF. Until that time, the operation of SF503 is repeatedly executed. When the main power supply of the P stand 2F is started up at the game hall at the start of the next morning, the determination of YES is made by the SF 504, the control advances to SF 505, and the stored value of the RAM is triggered by the call from the payout control board 17F. Control is performed to calculate a difference value based on the current value and output the difference value to the payout control board 17F. As described with reference to FIG. 102, this data is output in a loop by constantly repeating the same data while the CS signal is rising (during high level). As described above, the CLK signal is timed out, for example, at 100 μs, and control is performed to output data from the first bit in synchronization with the next rise of the CLK signal.

  Next, when a round flag is set after data output (CS, CLK predetermined operation) by SF 506, the flag is cleared and the stored value stored in the bit storage area of RAM 3-8 is set to 0. To clear. On the other hand, if the round flag is not set, the control is continued without clearing the stored value, and the process proceeds to SF507.

  In the above-described SF 506, before the stored value is cleared to 0, the stored value may be overwritten and saved to the current value, and then the stored value may be cleared to 0. In addition, the timing of overwriting and saving the stored value to the current value or clearing the stored value to 0 may be triggered by power-on, but in addition, after the transmission of the detection count data to the payout control unit 171F, the difference Any timing may be used as long as the value data can be normally output.

  Next, specific control contents of the count display process by the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIG. First, the data such as the difference value from the count counter 120F is received by the SF 510 when the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Next, in SF511, it is determined whether or not the received value is a value (= 63) where the round flag is set. If the received value is not the value at which the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to SF 512, and control is performed to display the received value on the 7-segment display 50F. On the other hand, if the received value is a value where the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to SF513, and control is performed to display the error number on the 7-segment display 50F. This error number is a number representing an abnormality in which the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened and the count value in the current value table reaches the number of times of opening during the period when the power of the P stand 2F is OFF such as at night. It is. Next, control to transmit the error number to CU3F is performed by SF514. The CU3F receives the error number, notifies the abnormality by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, displays the error number on the display 312F, and further displays the error number to a higher-level device (for example, a hall management computer or a hall server 801F). Control to send.

  In addition, the CU 3F that has received the error number may perform control to stop the game by the P stand 2F or restrict some functions by the CU 3F itself or in response to a command from the host device.

<P fraud detection alarm>
Next, alarm (notification) control by detecting fraud on the P platform 2F will be described. When it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P base 2F or the line between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is disconnected, the P base 2F is provided with an indicator or speaker provided on the P base 2F itself. The CU3F (more specifically, the CU control unit 323F, hereinafter simply referred to as CU3F) may be set to perform notification. For example, when fraud is detected by the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F makes a notification requesting the alarm setting to the CU 3F, and the CU 3F holds the alarm setting based on the notice. While the alarm setting is held, the CU 3F issues an alarm notification using a display or a speaker provided.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms when the power is turned on / off. FIG. 105 shows a nighttime frame release flag for detecting that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P platform 2F, a P platform disconnection flag for detecting the disconnection between the P platform 2F and the CU3F, CU3F The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU, and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at the CU3F based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, with reference to FIG. 105, the control of P fraud detection alarms before this embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P table 2F, the front frame open detection switch 13F detects the opening of the front frame 5F, and detects fraud with respect to the P table 2F. The nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 105 becomes H level at the timing when it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P platform 2F. When detecting the fraud, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU3F performs the alarm setting for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 105 (conventional), and the alarm setting is retained. The CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 105 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality with the display 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Next, when the power supply of the P base 2F is turned off and a line disconnection occurs in communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. Then, the P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the P unit line disconnection (off state). That is, the P base 2F transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3F at regular intervals when the communication with the CU 3F is normal. A predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the base 2F to the CU3F. Accordingly, the P base 2F (particularly the payout control unit 171F) detects a disconnection (off state) with the CU3F (particularly the communication control IC 325aF), and the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F receives a signal from the P base 2F. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (off state) is notified from the P unit 2F because it is not received.

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2F, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 105 and holds the alarm setting. CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) of P line disconnection instead of the night frame opening shown in FIG. 105 by the alarm setting of P line disconnection (off state). Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by the indicator 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  When the power of the P stand 2F is turned off, the nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 105 is reset and becomes L level. In the example shown in FIG. 105, since the front frame 5F is closed before the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned on from the off state, the nighttime frame release flag is L even when the power is turned on. Remain in level. However, the P stand 2F cannot notify the CU 3F of the release setting for canceling the alarm setting for releasing the nighttime frame because the nighttime frame release flag is at the L level while the power is off. Therefore, the alarm setting for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 105 (conventional) is held without being released even after the power of the P stand 2F is turned off.

  Thereafter, when the power source of the P unit 2F is turned on, the P unit line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 105 becomes L level. The P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F of a cancel setting request for canceling the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (off state). That is, when the P base 2F is not in communication with the CU 3F due to the off state, a predetermined signal is not transmitted. However, when the power of the P base 2F is turned on, the P base 2F is switched from the P base 2F to the CU 3F at regular intervals. A predetermined signal starts to be transmitted. As a result, the P base 2F (particularly, the payout control unit 171F) detects line restoration with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F, and the CU3F (particularly, the communication control IC 325aF) receives the signal from the P base 2F to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (off state) is notified from the P unit 2F.

  The CU 3F cancels the alarm setting for P line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 105 based on the notification from the P station 2F, and the alarm setting is canceled. The CU3F stops alarm notification (conventional) of the P line disconnection (off state). On the other hand, in the CU3F, the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P platform disconnection (off state). This night frame opening alarm setting (conventional) continues to be held until communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started and the alarm setting release signal is notified from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F (night frame opening release). . Therefore, the CU3F has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame is continuously performed even when the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 105 is stopped. In other words, if the alarm notification (conventional) of line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification (conventional) of opening the night frame use the same notification means, the store clerk turns on the power of the P stand 2F. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2F detects fraud, it notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU3F performs the alarm setting for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 105 (this implementation), and the alarm setting is retained. CU3F performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 105 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  In addition, when the power supply of the P unit 2F is turned off and the alarm setting request based on the P unit line disconnection (off state) is notified to the CU3F, the release setting for canceling the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation) is also performed by the CU3F. Is considered to have been notified. Therefore, based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for P line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 105 (this implementation) and cancels the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation). That is, the CU3F stops the alarm notification (this implementation) for opening the nighttime frame shown in FIG. 105, and then performs the alarm notification (this implementation) for line disconnection (off state). Therefore, the CU 3F is in a state where all alarm notifications are stopped when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned on, the line disconnection (off state) alarm setting (this implementation) shown in FIG. 105 is canceled and the alarm notification stops. It becomes. That is, this embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame continues even after the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Even if the alarm notification of the line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification of the nighttime frame opening are the same notification means, the store clerk can misidentify because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2F. Sexuality can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms at the time of disconnection. FIG. 106 shows a nighttime frame release flag for detecting that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P platform 2F, a P platform disconnection flag for detecting the disconnection between the P platform 2F and the CU3F, CU3F The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU, and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at the CU3F based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, with reference to FIG. 106, control of P fraud detection alarms prior to the present embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P table 2F, the front frame open detection switch 13F detects the opening of the front frame 5F, and detects fraud with respect to the P table 2F. The nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 106 becomes H level at the timing when it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P platform 2F. When detecting the fraud, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the nighttime frame release alarm setting (conventional) shown in FIG. 106, and the alarm setting is held. The CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 106 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality with the display 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Next, when a disconnection occurs in the communication wiring between the P base 2F and the CU 3F and a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. Then, the CU 3F receives an alarm setting request based on the P-unit line disconnection (disconnection) from the P-unit 2F. That is, when the communication with the CU 3F is normal, the P base 2F transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3F via the communication wiring at a constant interval. By disconnection, a predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Thus, the P base 2F (particularly the payout control unit 171F) detects a disconnection (disconnection) with the CU3F (particularly the communication control IC 325aF), and the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F can receive a signal from the P base 2F. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P-unit 2F. Further, the CU 3F cancels the setting by regarding the notification of the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (disconnection) as the notification of the cancel setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the set fraud (opening the night frame).

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2F, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting (conventional) of the P unit line disconnection shown in FIG. 106, and the alarm setting is held. The CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) of the P unit line disconnection in place of the night frame opening shown in FIG. 106 by the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by the indicator 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Even if the line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F, the open state of the front frame 5F is continued, so that the night frame open flag shown in FIG. 106 remains at the H level. In the example shown in FIG. 106, since the open state of the front frame 5F continues even if the communication wiring is disconnected (disconnection recovery) and the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started, Thereafter, the nighttime frame release flag remains at the L level.

  Thereafter, when communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is performed by restoring the disconnection of the communication wiring, the P stand line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 106 becomes L level. The CU 3F receives from the P unit 2F a release setting for canceling the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). That is, the P base 2F does not transmit a predetermined signal when communication with the CU 3F is not performed due to disconnection, but when the disconnection is restored, a predetermined signal starts to be transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F at regular intervals. . As a result, the P base 2F (particularly, the payout control unit 171F) detects line restoration with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F, and the CU3F (particularly, the communication control IC 325aF) receives the signal from the P base 2F to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P base 2F.

  The CU 3F cancels the alarm setting for P line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 106 based on the notification from the P station 2F, and the alarm setting is canceled. The CU3F stops alarm notification (conventional) of the P platform line disconnection (disconnection). On the other hand, in the CU3F, the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). This alarm setting for opening the night frame (conventional) continues to be maintained even after the disconnection with the CU3F is restored. Therefore, the CU3F has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame is continuously performed even if the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 106 is stopped. In other words, if the alarm notification (conventional) for line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame (conventional) use the same notification means, the store clerk recovers from the disconnection between the P stand 2F and CU3F. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2F detects fraud, it notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU3F performs the alarm setting (this implementation) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 106, and the alarm setting is retained. CU3F performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 106 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Further, when a line break occurs in communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F, and the alarm setting request based on the P stand line break (disconnection) is notified to the CU 3F, the alarm setting for releasing the night frame (this implementation) is canceled. The cancellation setting is also notified to the CU3F. Therefore, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting (this implementation) for the P standoff (disconnection) shown in FIG. 106 based on the notification, and cancels the alarm setting for the nighttime frame opening (this implementation). That is, the CU3F stops the alarm notification (this implementation) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 106, and then performs the alarm notification (this implementation) for the line disconnection (disconnection). Therefore, the CU3F recovers from the disconnection of the communication wiring, the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is started, the line disconnection (disconnection) alarm setting (this implementation) shown in FIG. 106 is canceled, and the alarm notification stops. All alarm notifications are stopped. In other words, the present embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification for opening the nighttime frame (conventional) continues even after the disconnection is restored. Even if the alarm notification for line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame are the same notification means, the store clerk may misrecognize because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2F. Can be reduced.

  When the open state of the front frame 5F in the P stand 2F continues even after the disconnection from the CU 3F is restored (night frame open maintenance), communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started and the night frame is released. Based on the alarm setting, the P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F again. CU3F performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 106 by the alarm setting of the P platform line disconnection (disconnection) notified again. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal. That is, even if the alarm notification of line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification of the nighttime frame opening are the same notification means, the store clerk stops the notification when the disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is restored, and then the P Since the notification by the alarm setting based on the line disconnection (disconnection) is performed after the communication between the base 2F and the CU 3F is started, the possibility of misidentifying both notifications can be reduced.

  Furthermore, if the time until the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started after the disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is short, the clerk may misidentify both notifications even with the above-described configuration. There is. Therefore, the P stand 2F performs the alarm setting for opening the nighttime frame again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after canceling the line disconnection (disconnection) alarm setting, and notifies the CU 3F. Thereby, even if the time until the communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is started after the disconnection between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is short, it is possible to reliably prevent the store clerk from misidentifying both notifications. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night is detected as fraud detection for the P stand 2F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and fraud detection for the P stand 2F. If so, it may be prize ball goto detection, illegal addition detection, illegal winning detection, radio wave sensor detection, and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which fraud is detected by the P stand 2F and an alarm setting request is notified to the CU 3F, but fraud is detected by the P stand 2F and the detection result is notified to the CU 3F. A configuration in which alarm setting is performed by the CU3F may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the P unit line disconnection is detected by the P unit 2F and the alarm setting request is notified to the CU3F has been described. However, the CU3F detects the P unit line disconnection and performs the alarm setting. Also good.

<Aggregating process performed by the card unit>
Next, the CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P stand 2F to perform a counting process of counting the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region according to the firing intensity. explain.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as “SF”) 10, the CU 3F determines whether or not a response of the status information response has been received from the P base 2F. If a response to the status information response is received (YES at SF610), the process proceeds to SF611. If not (NO at SF610), the process proceeds to SF615.

  In SF611, the CU3F performs a firing intensity correction process. This process is a process for correcting the firing strength T to 0 (minimum value) when the handle operation amount is substantially zero (value when the handle is not operated). By performing this correction processing, even when there is a variation between the handle operation amount and the firing strength T due to play or play of the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the firing strength T can be accurately detected. .

FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed procedure of the firing intensity correction process.
In SF111, CU3F determines whether or not it is immediately after power-on of P base 2F. For example, the CU 3F determines that it is immediately after power-on of the P stand 2F when the connection sequence processing at the time of power-on is being performed.

  If the P stand 2F has just been turned on (YES in SF111), the CU 3F stores the current launch intensity T as the initial launch intensity T0 in the internal memory in SF112. The initial firing strength T0 is the firing strength T when the handle operation amount is zero. That is, the CU 3F assumes that the handle operation amount is 0 immediately after the power of the P stand 2F is turned on, and stores the value in the internal memory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF114.

  On the other hand, if not immediately after power-on of the P platform 2F (NO in SF111), the CU 3F reads the initial firing strength T0 stored in the internal memory in SF113. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF114.

  In SF114, CU3F calculates a value obtained by subtracting initial firing strength T0 from current launching strength T as corrected firing strength T. Thereafter, the processing is moved to SF612 in FIG. Since the following tabulation process is performed using the emission intensity T after the correction process, the tabulation process accuracy is improved.

  Returning to FIG. 107, the CU 3F determines in SF 612 whether or not it is during a period in which the aggregation process should be interrupted (hereinafter referred to as an aggregation interruption period).

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the change in the firing intensity T and the total interruption period. In the example shown in FIG. 109, the firing intensity T, which was stable at a relatively small value, starts to increase at time t1, reaches the maximum value “99” at time t3, and is maintained at the maximum value “99” after time t3. ing.

  When the firing strength T changes, the passing area of the pachinko balls also changes, but there is a time lag until the passing area of the pachinko balls fired with the changed firing strength T is detected. Therefore, when the launch intensity T changes, even if the change in the launch intensity T thereafter stabilizes (converges to a certain value), the launch intensity T and the pachinko ball are not changed for a while (time corresponding to the above time lag). There is a possibility that the correspondence relationship with the passing area becomes unstable, and the reliability of the totalization processing result is lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the period from when the firing intensity T changes by a predetermined amount to when the predetermined period elapses is set as a total interruption period. The “predetermined amount” and the “predetermined period” may be fixed values or variable values that can be arbitrarily set and changed from the outside.

  In FIG. 109, the total interruption period is illustrated. In FIG. 109, the period α is illustrated as the total interruption period. This period α is a time t4 when the above-mentioned “predetermined period” has elapsed from the time t1 when the firing intensity T has increased by an amount (above “predetermined amount”) from the value lower than the threshold T1 It is a period until. In the “predetermined period”, it is predicted that, from the start of the period α, the pachinko balls that are fired after the start of the period α are stable and the firing intensity T is stable and before the firing intensity T is stable have all passed the game area 27F. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period up to the time point.

  In FIG. 109, periods β and γ are also illustrated as examples of other aggregation interruption periods. The period β is a period from the time when the firing intensity T starts to change (time t1) to the next time when the firing intensity T starts to stabilize (time t3). The period γ is a period from time t3 when the firing intensity T starts to change to time t5 when the predetermined period has elapsed after time t3 when the emission intensity T started to stabilize. The “predetermined period” used for setting the period γ can also be set based on the same concept as the “predetermined period” used for setting the period α. A period in which at least one of the periods β and γ is appropriately combined with the period α may be set as the aggregation interruption period.

  Returning to FIG. 107, if the aggregation interruption period is in effect (YES in SF 612), the CU 3 F interrupts the aggregation processing in SF 614. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF615.

  On the other hand, when not in the total interruption period (NO in SF 612), the CU 3F executes a process of totaling the number of times and the ratio that the pachinko balls have passed through each area by the firing intensity in SF 613. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF615.

  110 to 113 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the total data obtained as a result of the total processing.

  In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 110, the number of passages of each region (specifically, the start winning ports 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning ports 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning port 271F, the probability variation winning port 271aF) 110 is aggregated for each intensity T (in the example shown in FIG. 110, the variable areas 0 to 99 of the firing intensity T are divided into 10 areas, and the same applies to FIGS. 111 to 113).

  In the aggregate data shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the passing ratio of each region (specifically, the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning hole 271F) is indicated by the firing strength T. It is tabulated separately. In FIG. 111, the passage ratio of each region when the total number of passages of each region is 100% is shown for each firing strength T. On the other hand, in FIG. 112, the passing ratio of each region is shown for each firing strength T when the total number of passages for each firing strength T in each region is 100%.

  In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 113, the number of passages of each area (specifically, the start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning opening 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning opening 271F, the probability changing winning opening 271aF) is 100 respectively. The percentage of passage of each region when it is set as a percentage is tabulated for each firing intensity T. In FIG. 113, the ratio shown in parentheses in the column indicating the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271aF is the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271aF when the number of passages of the big prize opening 271F is 100% (that is, The ratio of the number of passes of the probability variation prize opening 271aF to the number of passes of the big prize opening 271F) is shown for each firing strength T.

  By referring to the aggregated data as shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T and the pachinko ball passage area (which area the pachinko ball is likely to pass depending on the firing intensity T) is appropriate. Can grasp. Therefore, at the store side where the P stand 2F is installed, the nail adjustment of the P stand 2F can be performed with reference to these tabulation results.

  Note that the aggregate data shown in FIGS. 110 to 113 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. Moreover, it is not always necessary to totalize the total data shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, and it may be appropriately selected as necessary.

  Returning to FIG. 107, in SF615, the CU 3F determines whether or not there is a request to display the total result. It should be noted that the display result display request is input to the CU 3F, the P platform 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is a request to display the total result (YES in SF615), the process proceeds to SF616, and if not (NO in SF615), the process ends.

  In SF616, the CU 3F displays a total result (total data as shown in FIGS. 110 to 113). The display location may be, for example, the display 54F or another display (not shown).

  As described above, the CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to perform the counting process of counting the number of times and the ratio that the pachinko balls have passed through each region by the firing strength T. Do. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to grasp which region the pachinko ball is likely to pass (or whether it is difficult to pass). Therefore, the counting result can be used for nail adjustment of the P table 2F.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine having the upper shooting structure, such as the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine having the lower shooting structure, the pachinko ball is fired until it enters the game area 27F. Since the distance is short, the pachinko ball passage region tends to change more greatly with respect to the change in the firing strength T. In the P stand 2F having such an upper shooting structure, the correspondence between the firing strength T and the passing area is totaled, which is very effective for adjusting the nail.

<Fire abnormal determination process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing intensity T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to determine whether or not there is a pachinko ball launch abnormality (coloring failure). Judgment processing is performed. Here, the abnormal shooting is an abnormality in which the firing motor 18F is operating even though the pachinko balls are not supplied to the launching device. The irregular hitting may occur when the player leaves the seat while the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a fixing device or the like with the handle operation amount being substantially larger than zero.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a firing abnormality determination process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF20, the CU 3F determines whether or not the firing strength T is greater than 0 (minimum value). If firing intensity T is greater than 0 (YES at SF20), the process proceeds to SF21; otherwise (NO at SF20), the process ends.

  In SF21, CU3F determines whether or not the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are changed. Note that CU3F avoids being always determined to be abnormal immediately after the start of the game, and after a certain period of time has elapsed since the firing strength T is determined to be greater than 0 (minimum value), It is determined whether or not the number of balls passing through the mouth has changed.

  When the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are changed (YES in SF21), CU3F determines that the firing is normal (that is, there is no abnormal shooting) in SF22.

  On the other hand, when at least one of the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet has not changed (NO in SF22), CU3F is determined to have a firing abnormality (that is, an abnormal shooting has occurred) in SF23. To do.

  Thus, CU3F which concerns on this Embodiment determines with the firing abnormality of a pachinko ball, when the firing strength T is larger than 0 (minimum value) and the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet does not change. . For this reason, it is possible to appropriately detect a firing abnormality (coloring abnormality).

<Putting area identification process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to identify which area of the game area 27F the pachinko ball has been driven into. Include area identification processing.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving area specifying process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF30, CU3F determines whether or not there is a driving area specifying request. The driving area specifying request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is a driving area specifying request (YES at SF30), the process proceeds to SF31, and if not (NO at SF30), the process ends.

  In SF31, the CU 3F performs a process of setting a “fired intensity threshold range” used for specifying a driving area (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range setting process).

  FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the driving area and the firing intensity threshold range. In FIG. 116, the driving area is divided into a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. In the present embodiment, the “right hit area” is an area on the right side of the game area 27F, and the “left hit area” is an area on the left side of the game area 27F. Further, the “bumping area” is an area where the pachinko ball is likely to flow toward the start winning opening 276F when the pachinko ball is driven into this area. The “injection area” is generally arranged at the upper left periphery of the variable display device 278F, but the position can be adjusted by a nail configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 116, a firing intensity threshold range is set for each driving area. Specifically, the firing strength threshold range AR for specifying the right hitting area AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi), the firing strength threshold range AL for specifying the left hitting area specified (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi), This is a firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) for specifying the concavity region. These firing intensity threshold ranges AR, AL, AB are stored in the internal memory (ROM or RAM) of the CU3F.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing.
In SF711, the CU 3F determines whether or not there is a request for changing the firing intensity threshold range. This change request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk.

  When there is a change request (YES in SF711), CU3F changes the firing intensity threshold range in SF712. Note that the specific change (how much the threshold range is changed) is made, for example, in accordance with a value input by manual operation or download by the store clerk who made the change request. The changed firing intensity threshold range is stored (updated) in the internal memory of the CU3F. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF32 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when there is no change request (NO in SF711), CU3F reads the firing intensity threshold range stored in the internal memory in SF713. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF32 in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 115, at SF32, CU3F receives launch intensity T from P platform 2F. Then, CU3F specifies in which area of the game area 27F the pachinko ball is driven, as a result of comparing the received launch intensity T with the launch intensity threshold range in SF33. Specifically, when the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AR (more than the lower limit value ARlow and less than the upper limit value ARhi), the driving area is specified as the “right hitting area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AL (more than the lower limit value ALlow and less than the upper limit value ALhi), the driving area is specified as the “left hit area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AB (when it is equal to or higher than the lower limit value ABlow and lower than the upper limit value ABhi), the driving area is specified as a “bumping area”.

  Thus, CU3F which concerns on this Embodiment specifies the implantation area | region of the pachinko ball according to whether the firing strength T is included in the firing strength threshold range. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to specify which region the player is aiming for.

  In the present embodiment, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is specified according to whether or not the launch intensity T is included in the launch intensity threshold range, but whether or not the launch intensity T is equal to or greater than a threshold value. The pachinko ball driving area may be specified according to the above.

  In addition, since the bump area is an area that overlaps a part of the right hit area or the left hit area, the launch intensity threshold range of the hit area is also the same as the launch intensity threshold range of the right hit area or the left hit area. , Some overlap. For this reason, in specifying the driving area, in addition to the right hitting area or the left hitting area, the hitting area may be specified.

<Measurement process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F, and the design of the variable display device 278F changes after the player starts the game. A measurement process is performed to measure the time until the start.

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of measurement processing performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF40, CU3F determines whether or not a changing signal is received from P table 2F. If the changing signal is received (YES at SF40), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal has not been received (NO in SF40), CU3F determines in SF41 whether the firing strength T has started to increase from 0 (that is, whether the player has started playing). Determine. If firing intensity T has not started increasing from 0 (NO in SF41), the process is terminated.

  When firing intensity T starts to increase from 0 (YES at SF41), CU3F starts time measurement at SF42.

  After starting the time measurement, the CU 3F determines in SF43 whether or not a changing signal is received from the P base 2F (that is, whether or not the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change). When the changing signal is not received (NO in SF43), CU3F moves the process to SF44 and continues time measurement. Thereafter, the process is returned to SF 43, and the time measurement is continued until the changing signal is received.

  When the changing signal is received (YES in SF43), CU3F ends time measurement in SF45. As a result, the CU 3F can measure the time from when the player starts the game until the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change.

  As described above, the CU3F according to the present embodiment starts from the time when the firing strength T starts to increase from substantially zero in a state where the changing signal is not received (that is, when the player starts the game). The time until the time when the changing signal is received (that is, the time when the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change after the pachinko ball wins one of the start winning holes 275F, 276F, and 277F) is measured. Thereby, it is possible to grasp how long the pachinko ball has won the start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F and the design of the variable display device 278F starts to fluctuate after the player starts playing. it can.

<System including hall management computer and central management device>
Next, a system including a hall management computer and a central management device will be described.

  FIG. 119 is a block diagram for explaining a system including a hall management computer (hereinafter referred to as a hall control) 900F and a central management apparatus 1000F.

  In one game hall, a plurality of P stands 2F and CU 3F are installed, and a hall server 801F and a hall controller 900F connected to the plurality of P stands 2F and CU 3F are installed one by one.

  The hall control 900F is directly connected to the hall server 801F. The hall control 900F includes an arithmetic device (not shown) and an internal memory, and is configured to execute a predetermined arithmetic processing based on data stored in the internal memory. The hall server 801F is connected to a plurality of CU3Fs, and collects output signals from the plurality of CU3Fs and transmits them to the hallcon 900F.

  The central management device 1000F is installed in a place different from each game hall. The central management device 1000F is communicably connected to a plurality of hall computers 900F installed in a plurality of game halls. The central management apparatus 1000F acquires and manages a plurality of aggregated data (see FIGS. 110 to 113) aggregated by the CU3F of each game arcade by the above-described aggregation process from a plurality of amusement halls for each model of the P unit 2F. .

<Summary calculation processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F is a process (hereinafter, referred to as FIG. 110 to FIG. 113) that aggregates the results of aggregation processing performed by each CU3F in its own store (the game arcade where it is installed) by type and gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “the game machine”). Summarization processing).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a procedure of summary tabulation processing performed by hall control 900F.

  At SF50, hall control 900F aggregates the result of the aggregation processing performed by each CU3F in its store in association with the model and machine number of the gaming machine. As for the timing of aggregation, for example, each CU 3F may perform aggregation every time aggregation processing is performed, or may be performed collectively at the end of business on that day.

  In SF51, hall control 900F executes a summary tabulation process using the aggregated data.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating the contents of summary summary data obtained as a result of summary summary processing. As shown in FIG. 121, the hall control 900F uses the results of aggregation processing by each CU 3F (see the aggregated data illustrated in FIGS. 110 to 113 above) as the gaming machine models (model X, model Y, model Z,... ) Data is collected separately and by machine number (001, 002...). Further, as shown in FIG. 121, the hall control 900F totals the total and average of each model.

  Returning to FIG. 120, at SF52, hall control 900F determines whether or not a summary count result display request is present. The summary count display request is input by, for example, a store clerk at the store. If there is a request to display the summary count result (YES in SF52), the process proceeds to SF53, and if not (NO in SF52), the process ends.

  In SF52, hall control 900F displays the summary count result. The display location may be a display (not shown), for example.

  As described above, the hall control 900F according to the present embodiment aggregates the result of the aggregation processing of each gaming machine in its own store by machine type and gaming machine (unit number). By referring to the aggregation result, it is possible to grasp the state of the nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store at once. Therefore, this aggregation result can be effectively used to determine the overall balance of nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store.

<Threshold range storage processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F acquires the firing intensity threshold range (see FIG. 116) used when each CU 3F in the store performs threshold range setting processing (see the flow in FIG. 117) from each CU 3F, Further, a process of storing for each gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range storing process) is performed.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram exemplifying data stored in the internal memory of the hall control 900F by the threshold range storage process. As shown in FIG. 122, the hall control 900F sets the firing intensity threshold range for each driving area by game machine model (model X, model Y, model Z...) And by machine number (001, 002...). Remember.

  This makes it possible to collectively manage the nail adjustment state (launch strength threshold range) of each gaming machine in the game hall.

<Other store model display processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F obtains and displays the aggregated data for each model of other stores (amusement halls different from the one where it is installed) from the central management device 1000F (hereinafter referred to as “other store model display processing”). Do).

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of another store type display process performed by hall control 900F.

  In SF60, hall control 900F determines whether or not there is a request to display other store type data. The other store machine type data display request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is no other store machine type data display request (NO in SF60), the process ends.

  If there is a request to display other store type data (YES at SF60), hall control 900F acquires the other store type data from central management apparatus 1000F at SF61.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram schematically illustrating another store type data. As shown in FIG. 124, in the other store type data, the aggregate data of other stores (A hall, B hall, C hall...) Is stratified by each model (model X, model Y, model Z...). ing. It should be noted that total data as exemplified in the above-described FIGS.

  Referring back to FIG. 123, the hall control 900F displays the total data of the other game machine type by using the other store type data acquired from the central management apparatus 1000F in SF62. The display location may be, for example, a display (not shown) connected to the hall control 900F, or may be the display 54F of any P platform 2F.

  As described above, the hall control 900F according to the present embodiment performs a model-specific display process of acquiring and displaying the aggregated data of the models of other stores from the central management apparatus 1000F. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to the state of the nail adjustment according to the model of the other store.

  Note that the data acquired by the hall control 900F from the central management apparatus 1000F is not limited to that shown in FIG.

  For example, when the central management device 1000F calculates the aggregated data (see FIG. 121) of each game hall and calculates the average data for each area of the game hall, the hall control 900F uses the average data for each area. It may be acquired from the central management device 1000F and used for adjusting the nail of the own store. Thereby, for example, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to what kind of nail adjustment is performed by another store in the same area as the own store.

  In addition, when the central management apparatus 1000F has data that summarizes the result of threshold range storage processing (see FIG. 122) stored in the hall control 900F of another store, the data of the other store is automatically stored. The store hall control 900F may be acquired (downloaded) from the central management apparatus 1000F and stored. Thereby, it is possible to set the firing intensity threshold range of the own store with reference to the setting status of the firing intensity threshold range of the other store. In addition, the hall control 900F may automatically set the firing intensity threshold range of its own store based on the data of another store acquired from the central management device 1000F.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 125 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 125, a slot machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 125, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 40, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is set to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 37, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, card return button, and replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 40). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P stand 2F or the S stand (slot machine) 2SF. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). This payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26F shown in FIG. 39, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF) in the main body frame 2aSF of the S base 2SF. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF and the concave drawer connector 33F shown in FIG. 39, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, various operation switches (buttons) and the like.

  Similarly to FIG. 99, the S base 2SF has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bSF corresponding to the front frame 5F of the P base 2F and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aSF and the board mounting board. The main control board is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 126 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 42 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

  The information to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the current gaming state. A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. Note that the information output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F is not configured to be output to the outside from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). Is operated, the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or the card unit (CU) 3F and the pachinko machine (P stand) 2F are not electrically connected. This is output when the game control microcomputer determines that a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16 by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the power of the pachinko machine (P units) 2F is turned on. The Such a game state information setting completion signal is used as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side), for example.

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormal signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 330F, out ball detection switch 701F, and launch ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the pachinko machine 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 2F is turned on, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the pachinko machine (P units) 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 49, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (addition update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2F and CU3F. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, in the S platform, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, and 33F, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F in the front frame shown in FIG. 40 are unnecessary.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F or 29SF.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display a number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball firing operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27F) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 49, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 51 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28F on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2F that has received the card return ready state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29F in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29F to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker 270F. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (22) In CU3F, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball count counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 44 to 64 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc. For example, CU3F, P The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a table 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 67 and 68 is applied between the CU control unit 323F inside the CU3F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, and between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. May be.

  For example, when the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, the CU control unit 323F transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325bF returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325aF based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, the security chip (SC) 325bF transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323F. Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a consent or refusal message for this based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, the SC 325bF sends the counting request message to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325aF based on the request on the P unit 2F side. The CU control unit 323F sends back a consent or rejection message to the 323F.

  When the processing related to the count request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, the communication control IC 325aF transmits a count request message based on the request on the P platform 2F side, The security chip (SC) 325bF returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323F.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU, but the gaming machine and the CU3F Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323F, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F coincides may be stored as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323F receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without using the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800F and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F is provided between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns and then returns to the original CU3F, and the ball is converted into a game ball 125 by the operation of converting the possession ball into a game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored in the CU3F as a custody ball (which also stores the C-ID and the insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls decreases one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 </ b> F displays that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is composed of an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29F performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. As with the display 54F, while the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof is decreased, an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display on the display unit 54F, a display in which the data on the number of game balls is converted to data on the number of balls (eg, a bar graph display) The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 51, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period has elapsed, the fact that the card returning operation has been invalidated may be displayed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the processing shown in FIG. 51 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 51 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2F or CU 3F. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2F or CU3F, a card return operation again, etc.) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3F determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2F. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of a card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, and the number of game balls stored in the P stand 2F that receives it is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data that permits card return is sent to CU3F, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, waiting for card return or prohibition of card return. The indicated data is transmitted to the CU3F.

  In the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P table 2F determines whether or not a card return operation is detected before the operation is detected. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3F. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2F transmits data indicating that to the CU 3F. In response, the CU3F may determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  In the above-described embodiment, the P table 2F detects the counting operation, while the CU 3F detects the card return operation, while the CU 3F detects the counting operation, while the P table 2F detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both operations may be detected by the P stand 2F or the CU 3F. Further, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU3F or the P stand 2F, and one of them may be the CU3F or the P stand 2F.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2F with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2F side is not improperly padded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error is determined on the CU3F side, such a situation is simply caused by the exchange of the CU3F (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3F after the exchange), and is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3F has been replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3F may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU3F regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge slot 309F after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the information waiting for card removal, and the P stand 2F that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card” 278F. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3F displays “please remove the card” on the display 54F and / or the display 312F while notifying the P stand 2F of the information waiting for the card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the status information request command including ON waiting for card removal = ON until the status information request command including OFF waiting for card removal is received. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received and communication is restored, and the P stand A configuration has been described in which a match determination is made with the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in 2F, the recovery process is performed if they match, and the continuation of the game is prohibited if they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F determines whether the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F matches the “store code” held in the P stand 2F, or The “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU3F and the “SC board ID” held in the P platform 2F are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In this case, it may be configured to prohibit the continuation of the game.

  (46) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500F is also wired (power line 500aF) in the main control board 16F, the connecting portion between the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500aF of the main control board 16F is An example (see FIG. 99A) is shown that functions as a main control connection detecting means and can detect an electrical connection between the game board 26F and the main control board 16F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the loop-shaped power line 500F may also be provided in the main control semiconductor chip 16aF of the main control unit 161F provided on the main control board 16F. Thereby, replacement of the main control semiconductor chip 16aF can also be detected.

  (47) In the present embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500F is also wired in the payout control board 17F, the connecting portion between the front frame 5F and the payout control board 17F functions as the payout control connection detection means. An example (see FIG. 99A) in which electrical connection between the frame 5F and the payout control board 17F can be detected is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the loop-shaped power line 500F may also be provided in the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF of the payout control unit 171F provided on the payout control board 17F. Thereby, replacement of the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF can also be detected. Here, the payout control means includes the payout control board 17F, the payout control unit 171F, the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and the like.

  (48) In the present embodiment, any of the entities that perform the above-described totalization processing, firing intensity correction processing, firing abnormality determination processing, driving area identification processing, and measurement processing can directly receive signals from the P base 2F. Although the CU3F is selected, the subject that performs these processes is not limited to the CU3F.

  For example, if necessary, a main body that performs all or part of these processes can be performed by using a hall control 900F, a hall server 801F, and the like that can indirectly acquire a signal from the P stand 2F via a stand terminal or an island terminal. Alternatively, the central management device 1000F may be used. For example, the hall control 900F may directly perform the counting process (flow in FIG. 107) for each gaming machine.

  If necessary, the main body that performs all or part of these processes may be a calling lamp (not shown) provided for each P base 2F. A call lamp is provided for each gaming machine, and has a function of calling a staff member of a game hall by operating a button by a player and a function of displaying a game history such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations between jackpots. It is.

  (49) Moreover, you may make it attach an IC tag to a pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity.

  (50) If the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed. Further, when the firing intensity is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed.

  (51) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the above-described firing intensity correction process may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25F and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (52) In this embodiment, the hall control 900F acquires the information of the P base 2F via the CU 3F, but the hole control 900F directly receives the information of the P base 2F from the P base 2F without passing through the CU 3F. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

(53) When the payout control unit 171F receives the value (= 63) in which the round flag is set, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or two or more of those listed in the following a to c. You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (54) In this embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, the P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or notification is given to the host server. May also be notified.

  (55) In this embodiment, when “Closed” is set, a card ID = 0 and a card insertion time = 0 for a gaming machine in which a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F. The configuration is described in which a counting process is performed in which it is assumed that a virtual card is inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the card ID of the virtual card that is considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card that was inserted immediately before closing, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing. The configuration may be such that it automatically associates with the card that has been stored.

  (56) In this embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P base 2F even though it is determined that the recovery request is not required by the CU 3F, the recovery determination of the recovery process is performed again by the P base 2F. A configuration has been described in which processing NG is notified to the CU 3F when it is not necessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is unnecessary to perform the recovery process determination again on the P platform 2F, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or a notification to that effect is sent to the host server. You may do it.

  (57) In the present embodiment, if the state where the key management server 800F does not reach the CU control unit 323F even if it transmits a health check request command continues for 10 days, for example, it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, The configuration in which the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of the CU 3F or P stand 2F is invalidated is displayed on the display 54F, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepwise. It may be invalidated.

  (58) In the present embodiment, the control of setting and canceling the alarm setting has been described in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud for the P base 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P base line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to alarm setting setting and release control in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud on the P base 2F and another alarm setting based on other fraud on the P base 2F. The alarm setting may be applied to the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting in three or more relationships between the alarm setting based on a plurality of frauds on the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A normal winning ball device, 6B normal variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game Effect Lamp, 11 Main Board, 12 Production Control Board, 13 Audio Control Board, 14 Lamp Control Board, 15 Relay Board, 20 Normal Symbol Display, 21 Gate Switch, 22A, 22B Start Port Switch, 23 Count Switch, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 7F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F payout control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A first setting means for setting any one of a plurality of stages as a first volume stage based on a first operation;
A second setting means for setting any one of a plurality of stages as a second volume stage based on the second operation;
Sound output control means for outputting sound of a sound volume corresponding to the first sound volume stage and the second sound volume stage from a sound output unit;
Display control means for controlling the display content displayed in the display area visible to the player,
The display control means displays a stage display indicating the second volume stage in the display area when the second operation is performed,
The gaming machine includes an operating device including, as an operation target of the first operation, a displacement unit that is physically displaced by the first operation at any of a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of steps that the first sound volume step can take. Prepared,
The first setting means changes the first volume level according to the position of the displacement part displaced by the first operation,
The change in the first volume level is reflected on the condition that the level display is displayed, and is not reflected before the level display is displayed.
The audio output control means outputs a specific sound from the audio output unit when the second volume level is newly set by the second setting means, and the first volume level is newly set by the first setting means. A gaming machine in which a specific sound is not output from the sound output unit when set to.